FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing HD30 series vector control inverter manufactured by
Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
This User Manual describes how to use HD30 series inverters and their
installation wiring, parameter setting, troubleshooting and daily maintenance etc.
Before using the product, please read through this User Manual carefully. In
addition, please do not use this product until you have fully understood safety
precautions.

Note:
 Preserve this Manual for future.
 Due to product upgrade or specification change, and for the purpose of improving
convenience and accuracy of this manual, this manual’s contents may be modified.
 If you need the User Manual due to damage, loss or other reasons, please contact
the regional distributor of our company or directly contact our company Technical
Service Center.
 For the first time using, the user should carefully read this manual.
 If you still have some problems during use, please contact our company Technical
Service Center.
 Telephone: 4008-858-959 or 189 4871 3800
 The product warranty is on the last page of this Manual, please preserve it for future.
Connection with peripheral devices

Three-phase AC power supply

MCCB

Contactor

AC input reactor

EMI filter

Braking resistor
(optional)

HD30 series inverter

DC reactor
(optional)

Ground connection

EMI filter

AC output reactor

Motor

Ground connection
 QUICK START for USER MENU of GROUP U

User menu of Group U

After map the parameters which will be used to the Group U, simply operating the Group U can
directly achieve parameters of read and write.
When the user selects fewer functional parameters which are scattered in the function menu, the
user can map the function menu to the user menu. Then the user can only operate in the user
menu to read and write the required function parameters. It not only can avoid the frequently
switch among the parameter groups but also can arrange the menu order according to our own
habits. That will be much easier to memory and operate.
Note:
It need set the tens of value of parameter F01.01 as 0 (does not lock the parameter mapping
relationship of Group U and Group F) so that you can modify Group U. The factory setting is 1
(lock the parameter mapping relationship of Group U and Group F).

Example for use

If you want to map F00.13 to the user menu map 1 (U00.00) and F03.01 to the user menu map 2
(U00.02), you only need to set U00.00 and U00.02 but do not set the mapping setting value
(U00.01 and U00.03), as following table.
Which, two digits of setting value before the decimal point represent the functional group number
of Group F, and the other two digits after the decimal point represent the intergroup number.

No. Name Value Range

00.00－23.03,99.99【Factory setting】
User menu map of
U00.00 00.13 If set as 99.99, there is no parameter
setting 1
map function
The setting value of map
U00.01 Without setting
1
00.00－23.03,99.99【Factory setting】
User menu map of
U00.02 03.01 If set as 99.99, there is no parameter
setting 2
map function
The setting value of map
U00.03 Without setting
2

After finish setting, modifying the setting value of map (U00.01 and U00.03) can change value of
F00.13 and F03.01 automatically.
Factory setting
The user menu Group U can set up to 16 parameters, of which there are 14 parameters have
been set.

No. Setting value No. Setting value

U00.00 00.01 (control mode selection) U00.14 03.01 (acceleration time 1)
00.06 (inverter maximum
U00.02 U00.16 03.02 (deceleration time 1)
output frequency)
00.08 (upper limit of operation
U00.04 U00.18 08.00 (motor rated power)
frequency)
00.13 (starting frequency digital
U00.06 U00.20 08.01 (motor rated voltage)
setting)
00.10 (frequency setting
U00.08 U00.22 08.02 (motor rated current)
sources selection)
00.11 (command setting source
U00.10 U00.24 08.03 (motor rated frequency)
selection)
U00.12 02.13 (stop mode selection) U00.26 08.04 (motor rated RPM)
 QUICK START for HD30 OPERATION

Note:
Some parameters have been set (factory setting) so that you could not set for the initial use.

Control the start/stop and set the running frequency via using the display panel
1. Power on. Using the display panel can set motor parameters (see the motor nameplate
parameter), running frequency and acceleration/deceleration time. See the following table.

No. Parameter name No. Parameter name

F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 F03.01 Acceleration time 1
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 F03.02 Deceleration time 1
F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1

2. Pressing panel’s RUN key can start the inverter, and pressing STOP key can stop the
inverter outputting.
Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via display panel
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.

K1 DO1 Output indicating signal at running

Forward terminal
DI1
K2 R1C
Reverse terminal Common terminal
DI2
R1B
Fault indication normally closed contact
COM
R1A
Fault indication normally open contact

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
No. Parameter name Setting value Meaning
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 terminal function selection 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 terminal function selection 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)

3. Set motor parameters (see motor nameplate parameters), running frequency and
acceleration/deceleration time via the display panel, as following table.
No. Parameter name No. Parameter name
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 F03.01 Acceleration time 1
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 F03.02 Deceleration time 1
F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1

4. Close the K1 of the wiring diagram, the motor will run forward; close K2, run reverse;
simultaneously close or disconnect, the motor will stop.
Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via analogue
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.

Forward terminal K1
DI1 DO1
K2 Output indicating signal at running
Reverse terminal
DI2
R1C
COM Common terminal
+10 R1B
Analogue input 1 Fault indication normally closed contact
AI1
GND R1A
Fault indication normally open contact

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
No. Parameter name Setting value Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 3 Analogue setting
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 terminal function selection 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 terminal function selection 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)
Frequency setting source (set by
F16.01 Analogue input AI1 function selection 2 (factory setting)
AI1)

3. Set motor parameters (see motor nameplate parameters), and acceleration/deceleration time
via the display panel, as following table.

No. Parameter name No. Parameter name

F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 F03.01 Acceleration time 1
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 F03.02 Deceleration time 1

4. Set the running frequency by adjusting AI1 analogue input.

5. Close the K1 of the wiring diagram, the motor will run forward; close K2, run reverse;
simultaneously close or disconnect, the motor will stop.
Control the start/stop via terminals and set the running frequency via communication
1. The terminal DI1 is forward running signal input, and DI2 is reverse running signal input, their
wirings are as following figure.
K1
Forward terminal
DI1
K2 DO1 Output indicating signal at running
Reverse terminal
DI2
R1C
COM Common terminal

R1B
Fault indication normally closed contact

12345678
RJ45
MODBUS R1A
SCI communication Fault indication normally open contact
communication terminal

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
No. Parameter name Setting value Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 2 SCI communication setting
F00.11 Command setting source selection 1 Terminal running command source
Forward running function (terminal
F15.00 DI1 terminal function selection 2 (factory setting)
forward signal input)
Rervese running function (terminal
F15.01 DI2 terminal function selection 3 (factory setting)
rervese signal input)
F15.18 DO1 terminal function selection 2 (factory setting) Inverter is running
F17.00 Data format 0 (factory setting) 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU
F17.01 Baud rate 3 (factory setting) 9600bps
F17.02 Local address 2 (factory setting)

3. Set motor parameters (see motor nameplate parameters) and acceleration/deceleration time
via the display panel, as following table.
No. Parameter name No. Parameter name
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 F03.01 Acceleration time 1
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 F03.02 Deceleration time 1

4. Close the K1 of the wiring diagram, the motor will run forward; close K2, run reverse;
simultaneously close or disconnect, the motor will stop.
5. Modify the running frequency via SCI communication function code 0X06 writing register
0x3201. Such as: modify the local address two of slave with running frequency of 45.00Hz, as
following table.

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum

Command
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
frame
Answer
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
frame
Control the start/stop and set the running frequency via using communication
1. The communication wirings are as following figure.

DO1 Output indicating signal at running

R1C
Common terminal

12345678
RJ45
MODBUS
R1B
SCI communication Fault indication normally closed contact
communication terminal
R1A
Fault indication normally open contact

2. After power on, set the functional parameters in accordance with wirings, as following table.
No. Parameter name Setting value Meaning
F00.10 Frequency setting source selection 2 SCI communication setting
Command setting source selection SCI communication running
F00.11 2
command source
F17.00 Data format 0 (factory setting) 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU
F17.01 Baud rate 3 (factory setting) 9600bps
F17.02 Local address 2 (factory setting)

3. Set the motor parameters (see motor nameplate parameters) and acceleration/deceleration
time via the display panel, as following table.
No. Parameter name No. Parameter name
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 F03.01 Acceleration time 1
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 F03.02 Deceleration time 1

4. Start and stop the local address 2 of inverter via SCI communication function code 0x06 writing
register 0x3200, such as forward start command, as following table.

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum

Command
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x01 0x4B 0x41
frame
Answer
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x01 0x4B 0x41
frame

Deceleration stops command, as following table.

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum

Command
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42
frame
Answer
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42
frame
5. Modify the running frequency via SCI communication function code 0X06 writing register
0x3201. Such as: modify the local address two of slave with running frequency of 45.00Hz, as
following table.
Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
Command
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
frame
Answer
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E
frame
 CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions ............................................................................ 1

1.1 Safety Definition ............................................................................................................... 1
1.2 About Motor and Load ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Installation Limitation ........................................................................................................ 2
Chapter 2 Product Information...................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Model Explanation............................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Nameplate ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Specifications ................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Ratings............................................................................................................................. 9
2.5 Parts of Inverter.............................................................................................................. 10
Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................................... 11
3.1 Installation Precautions .................................................................................................. 11
3.2 Requirement for the Installation Site ............................................................................... 11
3.3 Installation Direction and Space Requirements ............................................................... 12
3.4 Dimensions and Mounting Size ...................................................................................... 13
3.5 Display Panel Installation and Dismantle ........................................................................ 16
3.6 Plastic Cover Dismantle ................................................................................................. 17
Chapter 4 Electrical Installation .................................................................................................. 19
4.1 Wiring Precautions ......................................................................................................... 19
4.2 Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices ................................................................... 19
4.3 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring ................................................................................... 21
4.3.1 Power Terminal Description ............................................................................... 21
4.3.2 Power Terminal Wiring ....................................................................................... 23
4.4 Control Terminals and Wire Connection .......................................................................... 25
4.4.1 Control Terminal Description .............................................................................. 26
4.4.2 Wire Jumper Description.................................................................................... 27
4.4.3 SCI Communication Terminal Description .......................................................... 27
4.4.4 Control Terminal Connection .............................................................................. 28
4.5 Meet EMC Requirement of Installation............................................................................ 34
4.5.1 Correct EMC Installation .................................................................................... 34
4.5.2 Wiring Requirement ........................................................................................... 35
4.5.3 Wiring Motor ...................................................................................................... 36
4.5.4 Ground Connections .......................................................................................... 36
4.5.5 EMI Filter ........................................................................................................... 37
 4.5.6 Conduction, Radiation and Radio Frequency Interference Countermeasures ..... 38
4.5.7 Input and Output Reactor................................................................................... 38
Chapter 5 Operation Instructions................................................................................................ 39
5.1 Function Description....................................................................................................... 39
5.1.1 Inverter Run Command Source.......................................................................... 39
5.1.2 Inverter Frequency Setting Source ..................................................................... 39
5.1.3 Inverter Status ................................................................................................... 40
5.1.4 Inverter Operation Mode .................................................................................... 41
5.2 Operating Instructions .................................................................................................... 42
5.2.1 Display Panel Description .................................................................................. 42
5.2.2 Display Status ................................................................................................... 44
5.2.3 Display Panel Operation Examples .................................................................... 48
5.3 Initial Power On .............................................................................................................. 52
Chapter 6 Function Introduction ................................................................................................. 53
6.1 Group d: Display Parameters.......................................................................................... 54
6.1.1 Group d00 Status Display Parameters ............................................................... 54
6.2 Group F: General Function Parameters .......................................................................... 59
6.2.1 Group F00 Basic Parameters ............................................................................. 59
6.2.2 Group F01 Protection of Parameters .................................................................. 63
6.2.3 Group F02 Run/Stop Control Parameters........................................................... 64
6.2.4 Group F03 Acceleration/Deceleration Parameters .............................................. 68
6.2.5 Group F04 Process PID Control......................................................................... 70
6.2.6 Group F05 External Reference Curve Parameters ............................................. 72
6.2.7 Group F06 MS SPEED and Simple PLC ............................................................ 74
6.2.8 Group F07 Wobble Operation Parameters ......................................................... 78
6.2.9 Group F08 Asynchronous Motor 1 Parameters................................................... 80
6.2.10 Group F09 V/f Control Parameters ................................................................... 82
6.2.11 Group F10 Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters .............................. 85
6.2.12 Group F11 Reserved........................................................................................ 86
6.2.13 Group F12 Reserved ....................................................................................... 86
6.2.14 Group F13 Asynchronous Motor 2 Parameters ................................................. 86
6.2.15 Group F14 Reserved ....................................................................................... 88
6.2.16 Group F15 Digital I/O Terminal Parameters ...................................................... 89
6.2.17 Group F16 Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters ............................................... 102
6.2.18 Group F17 SCI Communication Parameters .................................................. 106
6.2.19 Group F18 Display Control Parameters .......................................................... 107
6.2.20 Group F19 Function-boost Parameters .......................................................... 109
 6.2.21 Group F20 Protection of Fault Parameters ..................................................... 116
6.2.22 Group F21 Reserved ..................................................................................... 119
6.2.23 Group F22 Reserved ..................................................................................... 119
6.2.24 Group F23 PWM Control Parameters............................................................. 120
6.3 Group U User Menu Mode Display Parameters ............................................................ 121
6.4 Group y Manufacturer Function Parameters ................................................................. 122
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................ 123
Chapter 8 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 127
8.1 Daily Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 128
8.2 Periodical Maintenance ................................................................................................ 128
8.3 Replacing Damaged Parts ............................................................................................ 129
8.4 Unwanted Inverter Recycling ........................................................................................ 129
Chapter 9 Options ...................................................................................................................... 131
9.1 Extension I/O Card (HD30-EIO).................................................................................... 131
9.1.1 Terminal Description of Extension I/O Card ...................................................... 131
9.1.2 Wire Jumper Description of Extension I/O Card ............................................... 132
9.1.3 Terminal Connection of Extension I/O card....................................................... 132
9.2 Plastic Interface Card (HD30-PIO) ................................................................................ 133
9.3 Panel Installation Assembly .......................................................................................... 134
9.3.1 Mounting Base................................................................................................. 134
9.3.2 Extension Cable .............................................................................................. 135
9.4 Power Regenerative Unit .............................................................................................. 135
9.5 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Selection ................................................................. 135
9.6 Reactor Selection ......................................................................................................... 137
9.7 Protective Cover........................................................................................................... 138
Appendix A Parameters ............................................................................................................. 139
Appendix B User Menu Setting Table ....................................................................................... 179
Appendix C Communication Protocol ...................................................................................... 181
Safety Information and Precautions 1

Product Information 2

Mechanical Installation 3

Electrical Installation 4

Operation Instructions 5

Function Introduction 6

Troubleshooting 7

Maintenance 8

Options 9

Parameters A

User Menu Setting Table B

Communication Protocol C
Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

1.1 Safety Definition

Danger: A Danger contains information which is critical for avoiding safety 1

Danger hazard.

Warning: A Warning contains information which is essential for avoiding a

Warning
risk of damage to product or other equipments.

Note: A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation

Note
of the product.

1.2 About Motor and Load

Compared to the standard frequency operation
The HD30 series inverters are voltage-type frequency inverter and their output is PWM wave with
certain harmonic wave. Therefore, the temperature, noise and vibration of the motor will be a little
higher than that at standard frequency operation.
Constant torque at low-speed operation
When the inverter drives a standard motor at low-speed running for a long time, the output torque
ratings will become worse due to the motor cooling is less effective. In that case, we suggest that
you should choose variable frequency motor.
Motor’s overload protecting threshold
When choose the adaptive motor, the inverter can effectively implement the motor thermal
protection. Otherwise it must adjust the motor protection parameters or other protection
measures to ensure that the motor is at a safe and reliable operation.
Operation above the motor rated frequency
If the motor exceeds its rated frequency operation, the noise will increase. It need play attention
to the motor vibration as well as ensure the motor bearings and mechanical devices to meet the
requirement of operation speed range.
Lubrication of mechanical devices
At long time low-speed operation, it should provide periodical lubrication maintenance for the
mechanical devices such as gear box and geared motor etc. to make sure the drive results meet
the site need.

Mechanical resonance point of load

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―1―

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
By setting the skip frequency of the inverter (F05.17－F05.19) to avoid the load device or the
motor mechanical resonance point.
Check the insulation of the motor
For the first time using of the motor or after long time storage, it need check the insulation of the
motor to avoid damage the inverter because of the worse insulation motor.
Note:
Please use a 500V Mega-Ohm-Meter to test and the insulation resistance must be higher than
5Mohm.

Energy feedbacks to inverter

For the occasion to boost load and the like, negative torque often occurs. You should consider
setting proper parameters of the braking unit if the inverter is prone to overcurrent or overvoltage
fault trip.

1.3 Installation Limitation

No capacitor or varistor on the output side
Since the inverter output is PWM wave, it is strictly forbidden to connect capacitor for improving
the power factor or varistor for lightning protection to the output terminals so as to avoid the
inverter fault tripping or component damage.
Contactors and circuit breakers connected to the output of the inverter
If circuit breaker or contactor needs to be connected between the inverter and the motor, be sure
to operate these circuit breakers or contactor when the inverter has no output, so as to avoid any
damage to the inverter.
Rated voltage
The inverter is prohibited to be used beyond the specified range of operation voltage. If needed,
please use the suitable voltage regulation device to change the voltage.
Change three-phase input to single-phase input
For three-phase input inverter, the users should not change it to single-phase input.
If you have to use single-phase power supply, you should disable the input phase-loss protection
function. And the bus-voltage and current ripple will increase, which not only influences the life of
electrolytic capacitor but also deteriorates the performance of the inverter. In that case, the
inverter must be derating and should be within the inverter 60% rated value.
Lightning surge protection
The inverter internal design has lightning surge overcurrent protection circuit, and has certain
self-protection capacity against the lightning.

Altitude and derating

―2― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
In the altitude exceeded 1000 meters area, since the heatsink efficiency will be reduced because
of the tenuous air, the inverter should be derating. Figure 1-1 is the derating curve of the inverter
rated current and the altitude.

Inverter’s rated current

100%
1

80% Altitude(m)

1000 4000
Figure 1-1 Derating curve of inverter rated current and altitude

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―3―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 2 Product Information

Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 Model Explanation
HD30 - 4 T 5P5 G / 7P5 P
Product types
G : general
P : fan and pump
2
Adaptive motor power
Refer to section ratings
Input phases
D : single/three-phase
T : three-phase
Voltage ratings
2 : 200－240V
4 : 380－460V
Inverter series
Vector control inverter

2.2 Nameplate

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

Inverter’s model MODEL: HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P

Adaptive motor POWER: 5.5/7.5kW
Input specification INPUT: 3PH 380-460V 15/19A 50/60Hz
Output specification OUTPUT:8.5/11kVA 0-460V 13/17A 0-400Hz
Software version Version: 1.00
Serial number S/N: Barcode

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―5―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

2.3 Specifications
Item Specification
Rated voltage and Single/three-phase: 200－240V, 50/60Hz
frequency Three-phase: 380－460V, 50/60Hz
Electrical

Voltage: fluctuating within ± 10%, imbalance rate < 3%

Accuracy
Frequency: ± 5%
Output voltage 0－input voltage
Output frequency 0－400.00Hz
150% rated output current for 2 minutes
Maximum current
180% rated output current for 10 seconds
Control mode Sensorless vector control; V/f control
Operation command
Panel; terminals; communication
channel
Performance

Speed setting mode Digital setting, analogue setting, SCI communication setting
Digital setting: 0.01Hz
Speed setting resulotion
Analogue setting: 0.1% × max-frequency
Speed control accuracy Sensorless vector control: ± 0.5%
Speed control range Sensorless vector control: 1:100
Torque control response Sensorless vector control: < 200ms
Start torque Sensorless vector control: 180% rated-torque /0.5Hz
Torque control accuracy ±5%
User-definable menu Total 16 user-definable maps, user can edit
Multi-group parameter
To achive 2 group parameters uploading to display panel of backup
upload and download
function
function
Programmable I/O Input interface programmable is up to 53 functions
interface Output interface pragrammable is up to 38 functions
Characteristic

Process PID adjustment Internal process PID module

To achive time and multi-frequency output with internal simple PLC
Simple PLC
module
Wobble operation Internal wobble operation module
Length control Internal length control module
Inverter built-in MODBUS communication protocol.
Compatible Available options:
multi-communication PROFIBUS bus module, compatible with PROFIBUS protocol;
protocol DeviceNet bus module, compatible with DeviceNet protocol;
CAN bus module, compatible with CAN communication protocol;

―6― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 2 Product Information

Item Specification
Stall overvoltage Bus voltage can auto-control against overvoltage fault
Auto-limited current
Output current can auto-limit against overcurrent fault
protection
Overload pre-alarm and
Overload early pre-alarm and protect
alarm
Load loss protection Load loss alarm function
I/O phase loss
Protection

I/O phase loss auto-detect and alarm function

protection
Braking fault protection Braking detecion and alarming function 2
Process PID commands
Process PID can auto-identify whether loss the reference and
and feedback loss
feedback or the alarm function
detection
Power output grounding
Power output grounding fault protection is enabled
fault protection
Power output short
Power output short circuit protection is enabled
circuit protection
Analogue supply +10V, maximum current 100mA
Digital supply +24V, maximum current 200mA
AI1: voltage 0－10V
Analogue input AI2: -10V－+10V/0－20mA (selectable voltage/current)
(it can be extended to 4 inputs with HD30-EIO)
Analogue output AO1, AO2: 0－10V/0－20mA (selectable voltage/current)
I/O feature

DI1－DI6
Digital input Remark: DI6 can be selectable for high-frequency input
(it can be extended to 9 inputs with HD30-EIO)

DO1, DO2
Digital output
Remark: DO2 can be selectable for high-frequency output

Programmable relay R1A/R1B/R1C: contact rating 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A

output (it can be extended to 4 outputs with HD30-EIO)
Communication

SCI communication RS-485 interface

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―7―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Item Specification
Five LEDs display
Setting frequency, output frequency, output voltage, output current,
Display panel

LED display
motor speed, output torque, switching value terminal, status
parameter, programm menu parameter and fault code etc.
LCD display Optional (HD-LCD), display operation contents in Chinese or English
Parameter copy Both LED and LCD display panel can achive quick parameter copy
Indicator 5 unit indicators, 5 status indicators
-10－+40℃, air temperature fluctuation is less than 0.5℃/min
The derating value of the output current of the inverter shall be 2% for
Operation temperature
each degree centigrade above 40℃. Max. allowed temperature is
50℃
Environment

Storage temperature -40－+70℃

Indoor, preventing from direct sunlight, no dust, corrosive, flammable
Location for use
gases, oil mist, water vaper, dripping or salt etc.
Altitude Less than 1000 meters, otherwise should be derating use
Humidity Less than 95%RH, non-condensing
Oscillation Less than 5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
Protection class IP20
Additional I/O option (HD30-EIO)
Extended I/O
Plastic interface option (HD30-PIO)
PROFIBUS option (HDFB-PROFIBUS-DP)
Bus communication DeviceNet option (HDFB-DeviceNet)
CAN option (HDFB-CAN)
Status display panel (HD-LED-L)
LED display pane with potentiometer (HD-LED-P)
Options

LCD display panel (HD-LCD)

Mounting base to panel (HD-KMB)
About display panel
1 meter extension cable to panel (HD-CAB-1M)
2 meter extension cable to panel (HD-CAB-2M)
3 meter extension cable to panel (HD-CAB-3M)
6 meter extension cable to panel (HD-CAB-6M)
Enhanced protection Protective cover (HD-CK-Frame4)
Dynamic braking unit (HDBU)
Power units
Power regenerative unit (HDRU)

―8― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 2 Product Information

2.4 Ratings
Rated capacity Rated input Rated output Motor power
Model
(kVA) current(A) current(A) (kW)
Single/three-phase power supply: 200－240V, 50/60Hz
HD30-2D0P4G 1.0 5.8 2.5 0.4
HD30-2D0P7G 1.5 10.5 4.0 0.75
HD30-2D1P5G 2.8 18.5 7.5 1.5
HD30-2D2P2G 3.8 24.1 10 2.2
Three-phase power supply: 200－240V, 50/60Hz
2
HD30-2T3P7G 5.9 19 17 3.7
HD30-2T5P5G 8.5 28 25 5.5
HD30-2T7P5G 11 35 32 7.5
HD30-2T011G 16 47 45 11
HD30-2T015G 21 62 55 15
HD30-2T018G 24 77 70 18.5
HD30-2T022G 30 92 80 22
HD30-2T030G 39 113 110 30
HD30-2T037G 49 156 130 37
HD30-2T045G 59 180 160 45
HD30-2T055G 72 214 200 55
HD30-2T075G 100 256 253 75
Three-phase power supply: 380－460V, 50/60Hz
HD30-4T0P7G 1.5 3.4 2.3 0.75
HD30-4T1P5G 2.5 5.2 3.8 1.5
HD30-4T2P2G 3.4 7.3 5.1 2.2
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 5.9/8.5 11.9/15 9.0/13 3.7/5.5
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 8.5/11 15/19 13/17 5.5/7.5
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 11/16 19/28 17/25 7.5/11
HD30-4T011G/015P 16/21 28/35 25/32 11/15
HD30-4T015G/018P 21/24 35/39 32/37 15/18.5
HD30-4T018G/022P 24/30 39/47 37/45 18.5/22
HD30-4T022G/030P 30/39 47/62 45/60 22/30
HD30-4T030G/037P 39/49 62/77 60/75 30/37
HD30-4T037G/045P 49/59 77/92 75/90 37/45
HD30-4T045G/055P 59/72 92/113 90/110 45/55
HD30-4T055G/075P 72/100 113/156 110/152 55/75
HD30-4T075G/090P 100/116 156/180 152/176 75/90
HD30-4T090G/110P 116/138 180/214 176/210 90/110
HD30-4T110G/132P 138/167 214/256 210/253 110/132
HD30-4T132G/160P 167/200 256/307 253/304 132/160
HD30-4T160G/200P 200/250 307/385 304/380 160/200

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―9―

Chapter 2 Product Information Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Rated capacity Rated input Rated output Motor power

Model
(kVA) current(A) current(A) (kW)
HD30-4T200G/220P 250/280 385/430 380/426 200/220
HD30-4T220G/250P 280/309 430/475 426/470 220/250
HD30-4T250G/280P 309/349 475/535 470/530 250/280
HD30-4T280G/315P 349/398 535/609 530/600 280/315
HD30-4T315G/355P 398/434 609/664 600/660 315/355
HD30-4T355G/400P 434/494 664/754 660/750 355/400
HD30-4T400G/450P 494/560 754/852 750/830 400/450

2.5 Parts of Inverter

Mounting hole Fan cover Mounting hole

Upper cover Bottom enclosure

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Nameplate
HZ A V RPM %

Display panel

Certification
Lower cover

Middle enclosure

Control terminal connection hole

Power terminal
connection hole
Plastic structure Metal structure

―10― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.1 Installation Precautions

Danger
• Do not install if the inverter is imcomplete or impaired.
• Make sure that the inverter is far from the explosive and flammability things.
• Do not operate the inverter until the power is cut-off 10 minutes later.

3
Warning
• It is required not only carry the display panel and the cover but also the inverter bottom enclosure.
• Do not play metal into the inverter when installing.

3.2 Requirement for the Installation Site

Ensure the installation site meeting the following requirements:
• Do not install at the direct sunlight, moisture, water droplet location;
• Do not install at the flammability, explosive, corrosive gas and liquid location;
• Do not install at the oily dust, fiber and metal powder location;
• Be vertical installation on fire-retardant material with a strong support;
• Make sure adequate cooling space for the inverter so as to keep the ambient temperature
between - 10－+ 40℃;
• Install at where the vibration is less than 5.9m/s2 (0.6g).
Note:
1. It needs derating use if the inverter operation temperature exceeds 40℃. The derating value of
the output current of the inverter shall be 2% for each degree centigrade. Max. allowed
temperature is 50℃.
2. Keep ambient temperature between -10－+40℃. It can improve the inverter operation
performance if install at the location with good ventilation or cooling devices.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―11―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

3.3 Installation Direction and Space Requirements

To achieve good cooling efficiency, install the inverter perpendicularly and always provide the
following space to allow normal heat dissipation. The requirements on mounting space and
clearance are shown in Figure 3-1and Table 3-1.

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

A A

Figure 3-1 Installation of the inverter

Table 3-1 Installation dimension of the inverters
Inverter power A(left and right) B(up and down)
≤55kW ≥50mm ≥100mm
≥75kW ≥150mm ≥350mm

When one inverter is mounted on the top of the other, an air flow diverting plate should be fixed in
between. Just as shown in Figure 3-2.

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

Figure 3-2 Installation of several inverters

―12― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.4 Dimensions and Mounting Size

W D
W1 4-Ød

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

HZ A V RPM %

H1
H

H2
Figure1
W 3
W1 D
4-Ød

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

H A V RPM %

H2
H1
H

Figure2
W D
W1
4-Ød
H2
H1
H

Figure3

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―13―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Table 3-2 HD30 dimensions

Structure Dimension (mm) Mounting size (mm) GW

Model Figure
size W H D W1 H1 H2 d (kg)
HD30-2D0P4G
HD30-2D0P7G
HD30-2D1P5G
Frame 1 HD30-2D2P2G 135 241 162 91 226 220 5 2.4 Figure 1
HD30-4T0P7G
HD30-4T1P5G
HD30-4T2P2G
HD30-2T3P7G
Frame 2 HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 165 266 190 115 253 245 5 4.4 Figure 1
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P
HD30-2T5P5G
Frame 3 HD30-4T7P5G/011P 200 299 210 146 286 280 5 5.8 Figure 1
HD30-4T011G/015P
HD30-2T7P5G
Frame 4 HD30-4T015G/018P 235 353 222 167 337 330 7 8.2 Figure 1
HD30-4T018G/022P
HD30-2T011G
HD30-2T015G
Frame 5 HD30-2T018G 290 469 240 235 445 430 8 20.4 Figure 2
HD30-4T022G/030P
HD30-4T030G/037P
HD30-2T022G
HD30-2T030G
HD30-2T037G
Frame 6 380 598 290 260 576 550 10 48 Figure 2
HD30-4T037G/045P
HD30-4T045G/055P
HD30-4T055G/075P
HD30-2T045G
HD30-2T055G
HD30-2T075G
Frame 7 500 721 330 343 696 670 12 80 Figure 3
HD30-4T075G/090P
HD30-4T090G/110P
HD30-4T110G/132P
HD30-4T132G/160P
Frame 8 HD30-4T160G/200P 620 917 360 450 890 850 12 115 Figure 3
HD30-4T200G/220P
HD30-4T220G/250P
Frame 9 HD30-4T250G/280P 740 1067 370 520 1040 1000 14 150 Figure 3
HD30-4T280G/315P

―14― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

Structure Dimension (mm) Mounting size (mm) GW

Model Figure
size W H D W1 H1 H2 d (kg)
HD30-4T315G/355P
Frame 10 HD30-4T355G/400P 970 1316 380 520 1286 1250 14 190 Figure 3
HD30-4T400G/450P

HD30 series cabinet appearance is shown as Figure 3-3 and the dimension is as Table 3-3.
W
W1 4-Ød

D1
D
3

Figure 3-3 HD30 series cabinet dimension figure

Table 3-3 HD30 series cabinet dimension
Dimension (mm) Mounting size (mm)
Model
W H D W1 D1 d
HD30-4T132G/160P-C
HD30-4T160G/200P-C 620 1250 360 500 270 18
HD30-4T200G/220P-C
HD30-4T220G/250P-C
HD30-4T250G/280P-C 740 1500 370 600 280 18
HD30-4T280G/315P-C
HD30-4T315G/355P-C
HD30-4T355G/400P-C 970 1650 380 700 280 18
HD30-4T400G/450P-C

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―15―

Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

3.5 Display Panel Installation and Dismantle

According to the direction of the Figure 3-4, press the display panel until hear a “click” sound. Do
not install the display panel from other directions or it will cause poor contact.

Figure 3-4 Installation of the display panel

There are two steps in Figure 3-5.
First, press the hook of the display panel according to the direction 1.
Second, take out of the display panel according to the direction 2.
1
2

Figure 3-5 Dismantle of the display panel

―16― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation

3.6 Plastic Cover Dismantle

The upper cover and the lower cover of the HD30 series inverter are removable. The dismantle
step is shown as Figure 3-6.
Before removing the upper cover, please take away the display panel.

(a)

The removing proceeses

of plastic cover board:
1．Extrude the hooks at both side together,
take off the lower cover, as (a).
2．Dismantle the screws of upper cover, as (b).
3．Extrude the hooks at both side together,
take off the upper cover, as(c).

(b)

(c)
Figure 3-6 Dismantle of the plastic cover

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―17―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

4.1 Wiring Precautions

Danger
• Only qualified electrical engineer can perform wiring job.
• Only when the power supply switch is completely off can you do the wiring job.
• You can’t open the inverter cover to do wiring operation until the power is cut-off 10 minutes later.
Do not wire or detach the inverter internal devices at power-on situation.
• Do not do wiring operation until the internal charge indicator of the inverter is off and the voltage
between (+) and (-) of the main circuit terminals is below 36V.
• Check the wiring carefully before connecting emergency stop or safety circuit.
• The earth terminal PE of the inverters must be reliable earthing. It must use two separate earth wire
due to the leakage current from the inverter to ground.
• It must use Type B mode when utilize earth leakage protection devices(ELCB/RCD). 4
• Do not touch the wire terminals of the inverter when it is live. The main circuit terminals is neither
allowed connecting to the enclosure nor short-circuiting.

Warning
• Do not do dielectric strength test on the inverter.
• Do wiring connection of the braking resistor or the braking unit according to the wiring figure.
• Make sure the terminals are fixed tightly.
• Do not connect the AC supply cable to the output terminals U, V, W of the inverter.
• Do not connect the phase-shifting capacitors to the output circuit.
• Be sure the inverter has ceased output before switching motor or change-over switches.
• The inverter DC bus terminals must not be short-circuited.

4.2 Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices

Please refer to the Table 4-1 for the recommended specifications.
Table 4-1 HD30 series inverters I/O wiring specification
Input Protection Main Circuit (mm2) Control
Model
MCCB (A) Contactor (A) Supply Cables Motor Cables Circuit (mm2)
HD30-2D0P4G 16 10 1.0 1.0 ≥0.5
HD30-2D0P7G 16 10 1.5 1.5 ≥0.5
HD30-2D1P5G 20 16 2.5 1.5 ≥0.5
HD30-2D2P2G 32 20 4.0 2.5 ≥0.5
HD30-2T3P7G 40 32 4.0 4.0 ≥0.5
HD30-2T5P5G 63 40 6.0 6.0 ≥0.5
HD30-2T7P5G 63 40 6.0 6.0 ≥0.5
HD30-2T011G 100 63 16 16 ≥0.5

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―19―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Input Protection Main Circuit (mm2) Control

Model
MCCB (A) Contactor (A) Supply Cables Motor Cables Circuit (mm2)
HD30-2T015G 125 100 25 25 ≥0.5
HD30-2T018G 160 100 25 25 ≥0.5
HD30-2T022G 200 125 35 35 ≥0.5
HD30-2T030G 200 125 50 50 ≥0.5
HD30-2T037G 250 160 70 70 ≥0.5
HD30-2T045G 250 160 95 95 ≥0.5
HD30-2T055G 350 350 120 120 ≥0.5
HD30-2T075G 400 400 150 150 ≥0.5
HD30-4T0P7G 10 10 1.0 1.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T1P5G 16 10 1.0 1.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T2P2G 16 10 1.5 1.5 ≥0.5
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 25 16 2.5 2.5 ≥0.5
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 32 25 4.0 4.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 40 32 4.0 4.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T011G/015P 63 40 6.0 6.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T015G/018P 63 40 6.0 6.0 ≥0.5
HD30-4T018G/022P 100 63 10 10 ≥0.5
HD30-4T022G/030P 100 63 16 16 ≥0.5
HD30-4T030G/037P 125 100 25 25 ≥0.5
HD30-4T037G/045P 160 100 25 25 ≥0.5
HD30-4T045G/055P 200 125 35 35 ≥0.5
HD30-4T055G/075P 200 125 50 50 ≥0.5
HD30-4T075G/090P 250 160 70 70 ≥0.5
HD30-4T090G/110P 250 160 95 95 ≥0.5
HD30-4T110G/132P 350 350 120 120 ≥0.5
HD30-4T132G/160P 400 400 150 150 ≥0.5
HD30-4T160G/200P 500 400 185 185 ≥0.5
HD30-4T200G/220P 600 600 150*2 150*2 ≥0.5
HD30-4T220G/250P 600 600 150*2 150*2 ≥0.5
HD30-4T250G/280P 800 600 185*2 185*2 ≥0.5
HD30-4T280G/315P 800 800 185*2 185*2 ≥0.5
HD30-4T315G/355P 800 800 150*3 150*3 ≥0.5
HD30-4T355G/400P 800 800 150*4 150*4 ≥0.5
HD30-4T400G/450P 1000 1000 150*4 150*4 ≥0.5
Remarks: *2, *3, *4 respectively represent “2, 3 or 4 main circuit cables are in parallel”.

―20― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

4.3 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring

Danger
• The bare portions of the power cables must be bound with insulation tapes.

Warning
• Ensure that AC supply voltage is the same as inverter’s rated input voltage.

4.3.1 Power Terminal Description

L1 L2 L3 U V W
(+) (-) BR PE
POWER MOTOR

Figure 4-1 Main circuit terminal layout of 5.5kW or below model

L1 L2 L3 U V W
P1 (+) (-) BR PE
POWER MOTOR

Figure 4-2 Main circuit terminal layout of 7.5－55kW model

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―21―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

L1 L2 L3
PE POWER
P1 (+) (-)

U V W
PE MOTOR

Figure 4-3 Main circuit terminal layout of 75－280kW model

PE L1 L2 L3 (+) (-)
POWER

PE U V W
MOTOR

Figure 4-4 Main circuit terminal layout of 315－400kW model

Table 4-2 HD30 main circuit terminal function description
Terminal Function Description
L1、L2、L3 Three-phase AC power input terminals
U、V、W Output terminals, connect to three-phase AC motor
P1、（+） DC reactor connection terminals
（+）
、（-） DC supply input terminals; External braking unit connection terminals.
（+）
、BR Braking resistor connection terminals
PE Earth terminal, connect to the ground

―22― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
4.3.2 Power Terminal Wiring
During trial operation, make sure the inverter runs forward when the forward command is enabled.
If not, switch any two of the output terminals (U, V, W) or modify the setting of parameter F00.17
to change the motor’s direction.
The power terminal wirings are shown as Figure 4-5, Figure 4-6, Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8.
The braking resistor and its selection are referred to section 9.5 Braking Unit and Braking
Resistor Selection (page 135).

L1 L2 L3 (+) (-) BR U V W PE

Optional EMI filter

Braking resistor
Optional AC reactor
Supply ground
4
Fuses

Mains supply
Figure 4-5 Main circuit connection of 5.5KW or below model

L1 L2 L3 P1 (+) (-) BR U V W PE

Optional EMI filter

Optional AC reactor DC reactor Braking resistor

(optional) Supply ground
Fuses

Mains supply
Figure 4-6 Main circuit connection of 7.5－55KW model

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―23―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

PE L1 L2 L3 P1 (+) (-) PE U V W

External
braking resistor
Supply ground

Optional EMI filter

Optional AC reactor (+) (-) BR1 BR2 Supply

DC reactor
(optional)
External braking unit ground
Fuses

Mains supply
Figure 4-7 Main circuit connection of 75－280KW model

PE L1 L2 L3 (+) (-) PE U V W

External
braking resistor
Supply ground

Optional EMI filter

Optional AC reactor (+) (-) BR1 BR2 Supply

ground
External braking unit
Fuses

Mains supply Remark: The DC reactor is built-in.

Figure 4-8 Main circuit connection of 315－400KW model

―24― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation

4.4 Control Terminals and Wire Connection

Danger
• The control circuit is designed as ELV (Extra Low Voltage) circuit and basically isolated with the
power circuit. Do not touch the control circuit when the inverter is on power.

Warning
• If the control circuit is connected to the external devices with live touchable port (SELV circuit), it
should increase an additional isolating barrier to ensure that SELV classification of external devices
not be changed.
• If connect the communication terminal of the control circuit to the PC, you should choose the
RS485/232 isolating converter which meets the safety requirement.

In order to efficiently suppress the interference to control signals, the length of signal cables
4
should be less than 50m and keep a distance of at least 0.3m from the power lines. Please use
twisted-pair shielded cables for analogue input and output signals.
The positions of control terminal, wire jumper and SCI communication port in the control PCB are
shown in Figure 4-9.
Wire jumper Wire jumper
CN9 CN6

SCI Wire jumper Wire jumper Control terminal

communication port CN7 CN8

Figure 4-9 Positions of control terminal, wire jumper and SCI communication port in the control PCB

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―25―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
4.4.1 Control Terminal Description
+10 AI1 AI2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 COM COM R1A
GND GND AO1 AO2 P24 SEL COM CME DO1 DO2 R1B R1C
Figure 4-10 Control terminal layout
Table 4-3 Control terminal function description
Item Terminal Name Function Description
AI1 Anglogue input 1 Input voltage: 0－10V (input impedance: 32kΩ)
Input voltage/current is selectable;
Analogue input
AI2 Anglogue input 2 Input voltage: -10V－10V (input impedance: 32kΩ);
Input current: 0－20mA (input impedance:500Ω)
AO1 Anglogue output 1 Output voltage/current signal: 0－10V/0－20mA;
Analogue output
AO2 Anglogue output 2 Programmable output
Analogue input use +10V as reference supply, maximum
+10 +10V power supply
output current is 100mA
+10V power
GND Analogue site, isolated to COM
reference ground
Digital input use +24V as supply, maximum output
P24 +24V power supply
Power source current is 200mA
Factory settings default SEL and P24 are connected.
Digital input
SEL Disconnected SEL and P24 when use external power to
common terminal
drive DI1－DI6
Digital reference
COM Digital site, isolated to CME
ground
Programmable bipolar optional input signal
Input voltage: 0－30VDC
DI1－DI5 input impedance: 4.7kΩ
Digital input DI1－DI6 Digital input 1－6
DI6 input impedance: 1.6kΩ
DI6 can be selectable for high-frequency input,
max-frequency 50kHz
Programmable optocoupler isolation, open collector
DO1 Digital output 1 output
Output voltage: 0－30VDC, max-output current 50mA
DO1 reference Isolated COM, default short connected COM; Disconnect
CME
ground CME and COM if need isolation output
Digital output
Programmable optical-couple isolation, open collector
output or pulse frequency output can be selectable;
DO2 Digital output 2 Output voltage: 0－30VDC, max-output current 50mA;
It is equal to DO1 while selecting open collector output;
Select pulse frequency output, max-frequency 50kHz
Programmable output, contact rating: 250VAC/3A or
R1A/ R1B/ Relay contact
Relay output 30VDC/1A
R1C output
R1B,R1C: normally closed; R1A,R1C: normally open

―26― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
4.4.2 Wire Jumper Description
Table 4-4 HD30 wire jumper function and setting description
Jumper
Function and setting description Factory setting
switch
AI2 analogue input channel can select voltage or current signal.

1
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN6 are short-circuited, AI2 channel

CN6
CN6 inputs voltage signal;
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN6 are short-circuited, AI2 channel

3
inputs current signal.
AO1 analogue output channel can select voltage or current signal.

1
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN7 are short-circuited, AO1 channel

CN7
CN7 outputs voltage signal;
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN7 are short-circuited, AO1 channel

3
outputs current signal.
AO2 analogue output channel can select voltage or current signal.

1
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN8 are short-circuited, AO2 channel

CN8
CN8 outputs voltage signal;
4
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN8 are short-circuited, AO2 channel

3
outputs current signal.
SCI communication can select proper resistance.

1
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN9 are short-circuited, no resistance;

CN9
CN9
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN9 are short-circuited, select the proper

3
resistance.

4.4.3 SCI Communication Terminal Description

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 8
RJ45 terminal Signal +5V 485+ +5V GND GND GND 485- Reserved

Figure 4-11 SCI communication terminal

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―27―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
4.4.4 Control Terminal Connection
DO1 Programmable open-collector
output channel 1
Multi-function input terminal 1
DI1
DO1 reference ground
Multi-function input terminal 2 CME
DI2 HD30
DO2 Programmable open-collector
Multi-function input terminal 3
DI3 control board output channel 2
Multi-function input terminal 4 DO2 reference ground
DI4 COM
Multi-function input terminal 5
DI5 R1C
Multi-function input terminal 6 Programmable
DI6 R1B
relay output
Digital ground R1A
COM
Shielded cable
+10
Analogue input 1
AI1
Analogue input 2 AO1 Analogue output channel 1
1

1
1

AI2
CN7

CN8
CN9

AO2 Analogue output channel 2

3

Analogue ground
3

GND
GND Analogue ground

PE
Figure 4-12 HD30 control circuit connection diagram

―28― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Wiring of digital input terminal
Dry contact connections
1．If the internal 24V power supply is used, the connection is as shown in Figure 4-13. (The SEL
and the P24 are short-circuited at factory)
+ 24V
Dry contact connection
P24 using internal power

SEL + 3.3V

+
Current

K R
-
DI1...DI6
COM
Figure 4-13 Dry contact connection when using internal 24V power
4
2．If the external power supply is used, the connection is as shown in Figure 4-14. (Note that the
SEL and the P24 are not short-circuited)
+ 24V
Dry contact connection
P24 using external power

SEL + 3.3V

+ +
DC - Current
12－30V
K R
-
DI1...DI6
COM
Figure 4-14 Dry contact connection when using external power

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―29―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Source (Drain) connections
1. If the external power supply is used, the source connection is as shown in Figure 4-15. (Note
that the SEL and the P24 are not short-circuited)
+ 24V
Source connection
External P24
using external power
controller
SEL + 3.3V

+ +
-
DC
12－30V
1 R
-
DI1

+ 3.3V

6 R
-
DI6

COM
Figure 4-15 Source input signal connection when using external power
2. If the external power supply is used, the drain connection is as shown in Figure 4-16. (Note
that the SEL and the P24 are not short-circuited)

DC 12－30V + 24V Drain connection

P24 using external power
+
-

SEL + 3.3V

COM +

1 R
-
DI1

+ 3.3V

6 R
-
External DI6
controller
Figure 4-16 Drain input signal connection when using external power

―30― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
3. If the inverter’s internal 24V power supply is used, the common emitter output connection of
NPN transistor in the external controller is as shown in Figure 4-17.
+ 24V
External NPN connection
P24 using internal power
controller
SEL + 3.3V

1 R
-
DI1

+ 3.3V

6 R
- 4
DI6

COM

Figure 4-17 NPN signal input connection when using internal 24V power
4. If the inverter’s internal +24V power supply is used, the common emitter output connection of
the PNP transistor in the external controller is as shown in Figure 4-18. (Note that the SEL and
the P24 are not short-circuited)
+ 24V
PNP connection
P24 using internal power

SEL + 3.3V

COM +

1 R
-
DI1

+ 3.3V

6 R
-
External DI6
controller
Figure 4-18 PNP signal input connection when using internal 24V power

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―31―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Wiring of analogue input terminal
The AI1 is voltage input and the voltage input range is 0－10V. Its connection and disposal are
shown in Figure 4-19.
The AI2 is selectable voltage/current input, the input range are -10－+10V/0－20mA. Its
connection and disposal are shown in Figure 4-20.
The input voltage signal can use the control board of internal +/-10V, or be provided by the
external.
Less than 50 m Signal line winding on the
ferrite core about 2 or 3 turns
+10

Potentiometer
AI1
Control Filter capacitor
AI1 Control 0.022uF
Board
Board 50V
GND GND
PE Ferrite core
Figure 4-19 AI1 input terminal connection and disposal
Less than 50 m
Signal line winding on the
+10 ferrite core about 2 or 3 turns
Control
AI2
Potentiometer

Board Filter capacitor

AI2 Control 0.022uF
Board 50V
GND GND
PE Ferrite core
Figure 4-20 AI2 input terminal connection and disposal
The analogue input signal is a weak electrical signal, which is vulnerable to external interference.
Therefore the shielded cable is required to use, which is no more than 50 meters and should be
reliably grounded. In some more serious interference occasions, the analog input signal is
needed to add the filter capacitor or ferrite ring.

―32― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Wiring of multi-function output terminal
1. The multi-function output terminal DO1 can use the inverter’s internal 24V power supply or the
external power supply. The connections are as shown in Figure 4-21.

+ 24V + 24V
Using internal power

Using external power

P24 P24
Relay
coil
DO1 DO1 +
Relay - DC
coil 12－30V
CME CME
COM COM
Figure 4-21 DO1 terminal connection
2. The frequency signal output terminal DO2 can use the inverter’s internal 24V power supply or
the external power supply. The connections are as shown in Figure 4-22.
4
+ 24V + 24V R:10KΩ resistor
f： digital frequency counter
Using internal power

Using external power

P24 P24
R
R
DO2 DO2
+
f f - DC
12－30V
COM COM

Figure 4-22 DO2 terminal connection

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―33―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

4.5 Meet EMC Requirement of Installation

4.5.1 Correct EMC Installation
According national standards GB/T12668.3, the inverter should meet the two requirements of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) and anti-electromagnetic interference. The international
standards IEC/61800-3 (VVVF drive system part 3: EMC specifications and test methods) are
identical to the national standards GB/T12668.3.
HD30 Series Inverters are designed and produced according to the requirements of IEC/61800-3.
Please install the inverter as per the description below so as to achieve good electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC).
Divide the installation space into different areas:
In a drive system, the inverter, control equipment and sensors are installed in the same cabinet,
the electromagnetic noise should be suppressed at the main connecting points with the EMI filter
and input reactor installed in cabinet to satisfy the EMC requirements.
The most effective but expensive measure to reduce the interference is to isolate the noise
source and the noise receiver, which should be considered in mechanical system design phase.
In driving system, the noise source can be inverter, braking unit and contactor. Noise receiver can
be automation equipment, encoder and sensor etc.
The mechanical/system is divided into different EMC areas according to its electrical
characteristics. The recommended installation positions are shown in Figure 4-23.
Mains power supply

Area E Area A: install transformers of control power supply,

Power supply control cabinet control devices and sensor etc.
Area A Area C
Area B: interfaces of signal and control cables,
AC reactor correct immunity level is required.

Area C: install noise sources such as input reactor,

the inverter, braking unit and contactor.
Control devices (the EMI filter
host PC, PLC etc.)
Area D: install output EMI filter and its cable
connection parts.
Area B HD30 inverter Area E: power supply.

Sensor (temperature, Area D Area F: install motor and its cables.

liquid level sensor)
EMI filter

Earth isolated board

Manufacture machines
Area F
Mechanical system Motor

Figure 4-23 System wiring sketch

―34― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
Remarks:
• All areas should be isolated in space to achieve electromagnetic decoupling effect.
• The minimum distance between areas should be 20cm, and use earthing bars for decoupling
among areas, the cables from different area should be placed in different tubes.
• EMI filters should be installed at the interfaces between different areas if necessary.
• Bus cable (such as RS485) and signal cable must be shielded.
4.5.2 Wiring Requirement
In order to avoid interference intercoupling, it is recommended to separate the motor cables and
the control cables from power supply cables, and keep enough distance among the cables.
Especially when the cables are laid in parallel and the cable length is long, the signal cables
should cross the power supply cables perpendicularly as shown in Figure 4-24.
Motor cables

> 30cm
> 50cm 4
Power or motor cables
Power cables

> 20cm Signal/control cables

Signal/control cables
Figure 4-24 System wiring
Shielded/armoured cable: High frequency low impedance shielded cable should be used. For
example: copper net, aluminum net or iron net.
Normally, the control cables must use the shielded cables and the shielding metal net must be
connected to the metal enclosure of the inverter by cable clamps as shown in Figure 4-25.

PE PE

Enclosure Enclosure
Figure 4-25 Correct connection of the shielded cable

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―35―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
4.5.3 Wiring Motor
Longer the cable between the inverter and the motor is, higher the high-frequency leakage
current is, causing the inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral
devices.
When the cable between the motor and the inverter is longer than 100 meters, it is recommended
to install output reactor and adjust the carrier frequency as per the instruction in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Carrier frequency and the cable length between inverter and motor
Cable length < 30m 30－50m 50－100m ≥ 100m
Carrier frequency 15kHz below 10kHz below 5kHz below 2kHz below

The inverter should be derated if the motor cables are too long or their cross sectional area (CSA)
is too large. The inverter’s cables should be the cables with specified CSA (see Table 4-1)
because the capacitance of the cable to ground is in proportional to the cable’s CSA. If the cable
with big CSA is used, its current should be reduced. The current should be decreased by 5%
when per level of CSA is increased.
4.5.4 Ground Connections
The earth terminals PE must be connected to earth properly. The earthing cable should be as
short as possible (the earthing point should be as close to the inverter as possible) and the
earthing area should be as large as possible.
The grounding resistance should be less than 10Ω for 380V Class inverters.
Do not share the earth wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools. It could
share the earthing pole, but the motor and the inverter each have their own earthing pole, then
the earthing effect is better. The recommended and avoided earthing methods are respectively
shown in Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27.

HD30 Other devices HD30 Other devices

PE PE

Dedicated earthing pole Sharing earthing pole

(optimal) (good)
Figure 4-26 Recommended earthing method

HD30 Other devices HD30 Other devices

PE PE
Sharing earthing pole
(not so good)
Figure 4-27 Avoided earthing method

―36― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 4 Electrical Installation
When using more than one inverter, be careful not to loop the earth wire as shown in Figure 4-28.

HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30

PE PE PE PE

Prohibited earthing method

Figure 4-28 Prohibited earthing method

4.5.5 EMI Filter

The EMI filter should be used in the equipment that may generate strong EMI or the equipment
that is sensitive to the external EMI. The EMI filter should be a dual-way low pass filter through
which lower frequency current can flow while higher frequency current can hardly flow.
Function of EMI filter
1．The EMI filter ensures the equipment not only can satisfy the conducting emission and
conducting sensitivity in EMC standard but also can suppress the radiation of the equipment.
2．It can prevent the EMI generated by equipment from entering the power cable and the EMI 4
generated by power cable from entering equipment.
Common mistakes in using EMI filter
1．Too long the power cable is between the EMI filter and the inverter
The filter inside the cabinet should be located near to the input power source. The length of the
power cables should be as short as possible.
2．Too close the input and output cables of the EMI filter
The distance between input and output cables of the filter should be as far apart as possible.
Otherwise the high-frequency noise may be coupled between the cables and bypass the filter.
Thus, the filter will become ineffective.
3．Bad earthing of the EMI filter
The EMI filter’s enclosure must be earthed properly to the metal case of the inverter. In order to
achieve better earthing effect, make use of a special earthing terminal on the filter’s enclosure. If
you use one cable to connect the filter to the case, the earthing is useless for high frequency
interference. When the frequency is high, so is the impedance of cable, hence there is little
bypass effect.
The correct installation: The filter should be mounted on the enclosure of equipment. Ensure to
clear away the insulation paint between the filter case and the enclosure for good earthing
contact.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―37―

Chapter 4 Electrical Installation Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
4.5.6 Conduction, Radiation and Radio Frequency Interference
Countermeasures
EMI of the inverter
The inverter’s operating theory means that some EMI is unavoidable. The inverter is usually
installed in a metal cabinet which normally little affects the instruments outside the metal cabinet.
The cables are the main EMI source. If connect the cables according to this manual, the EMI can
be suppressed effectively.
If the inverter and other control equipment are installed in one cabinet, the area rule must be
observed. Pay attention to the isolation between different areas, cable layout and shielding.
Reducing conducted interference
Please add a noise filter to suppress conducted interference on the output side. Additionally,
conducted interference can be efficiently reduced by threading all the output cables through a
grounded metal tube. And conducted interference can be dramatically decreased when the
distance between the output cables and the signal cables is above 0.3m.
RF interference clearing
The I/O cables and the inverter produce radio frequency interference. A noise filter can be
installed both on the input side and output side, and shield them with iron utensil to reduce RF
interference. The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor should be as short as
possible shown in Figure 4-29.
MCCB Iron box Metal tube
X

～ X EMI filter HD30 EMI filter M

X

Figure 4-29 RF interference clearing

4.5.7 Input and Output Reactor

AC input reactor
The purpose of installing an AC input reactor is: to increase the input power factor; to dramatically
reduce the harmonics on the input side at the high voltage point of common coupling and prevent
input current unbalance which can be caused by the phase-to-phase unbalance of the power
supply. An AC line reactor which will help to protect the input rectifiers also reduces external line
voltage spikes (for example the lightning!).
DC reactor
The installation of a DC reactor can increase the input power factor, improve the inverter’s overall
efficiency and thermal stability, substantially eliminate the upper harmonics influence on the
inverter’s performance, and considerably decrease the conducted and radiated electromagnetic
emissions from the inverter.
AC output reactor
Generally speaking, when the length of the cable between inverter and motor is more than 100m,
it will cause leakage current and inverter tripping. It suggests that the user should consider
installing an AC output reactor.

―38― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions

Danger
• Only when the inverter terminal cover has been fitted can you switch on AC power source. Do not
remove the cover after power is switched on.
• Ensure the motor and the mechnical device are in the use application before the inverter starts.
• Keep away from the inverter if the auto-restart function is enabled at power outage.
• If changed the PCBA, you should correctly set the parameters before operating.

Warning
• Do not check or detect the signal during the inverter operation.
• Do not randomly change the inverter parameter setting.
• Please thoroughly complete all control debugging and testing, make all adjustments and conduct a
full safety assessment before switching the run command source of the inverter.
• Do not touch the energy-depletion braking resistor due to the high temperature.
5
5.1 Function Description
Note:
In the following sections, you may encounter control, running and status of the inverter
description many times.
Please read this section carefully. It will help you to correctly understand and use the functions to
be discussed.

5.1.1 Inverter Run Command Source

It defines the source from which the inverter receives run commands (START, RUN, STOP, JOG).
There are three run command sources which can be selected through function parameter F00.11
and multi-function terminals:
Display panel: Via RUN , STOP and JOG keys to achieve run, stop and jog operation control.
Control terminal: Via control terminal to achieve start and stop operation control.
SCI communication port: Via SCI communication to achieve start and stop operation control.
5.1.2 Inverter Frequency Setting Source
The final setting frequency of the HD30 inverter results from many calculating (defined by F19.01)
the value of 5 master setting sources (set by F00.10) and 6 auxiliary setting sources (set by
F19.00).
Note:
The frequency will be set by master setting source if the auxiliary is the same as the master
setting source.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―39―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Master setting frequency sources
0: Display panel digital setting, change the value by and keys. (Initial value is set by
F00.13)
1: Terminal digital setting, change the value by terminals UP/DN. (Initial value is set by F00.13)
2: SCI communication digital setting. (Initial value is 0)
3: Analogue setting
4: Terminal pulse setting (F15.05 = 53)
Auxiliary setting frequency sources
0: No auxiliary frequency
1: Digital setting 1, change the value by and keys. (Initial value is set by F19.03)
2: Digital setting 2, change the values by terminals UP/DN. (Initial value is set by F19.03)
3: Digital setting 3, SCI communication direct setting. (Initial value is 0)
4: Analogue setting
5: Terminal pulse setting (F15.05 = 53)
6: Process PID output setting
5.1.3 Inverter Status
HD30 inverter has three running status: Stop, Run and Motor parameters auto-tuning.
Stop: After the inverter is switched on and initialized, if no run command inputs or the stop
command is given, there is no output from U, V, W of the inverter. Therefore the RUN indicator
will flash.
Run: The inverter starts output after it receives the run command. The RUN indicator is lighting.
Motor parameters auto-tuning: If the inverter receives the run command by the function
parameter F08.06/F13.07 set as 1 or 2, the inverter will enter motor parameters auto-tuning
status. Then enters stop status if the auto-tuning process is completed.

―40― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
5.1.4 Inverter Operation Mode
HD30 inverter has six types of operating mode: Jog, Process PID adjustment, MS SPEED,
Simple PLC, Wobble operation and Common operation.
Jog:
In the display panel control mode, after press JOG key, the inverter will be on the jog frequency
operation. (It need set the parameters of F00.15, F03.15 and F03.16)
In the terminal control mode, after receive the Jog command from the multi-function terminal
(No.20－No.25 functions), the inverter will be on the corresponding jog frequency operation. (It
need set the parameters of F00.15, F03.15, F03.16 and F05.21)
Process PID adjustment:
If the process PID adjustment function is enabled (F04.00=1), the inverter will select the process
PID adjustment operation mode, i.e. it will perform PID control according to the setting and
feedback values (it need set function parameters of Group F04). This function can be disabled by
a multi-function terminal (No.33 function) and switch to other operation modes.
MS SPEED:
To achieve MS SPEED operation, it should use the logic combination of the multi-function
terminals (No.13－No. 16 function) and select multi-step frequency 1－15 (F06.00－F06.14).
Simple PLC: 5
If the simple PLC function is enabled (F06.15=1), the inverter will select PLC operating mode and
will operate in the preset operating parameter mode (see explanation of Group F06). The simple
PLC function can be disabled by a digital input multi-functional terminal (No. 30 function).
Wobble operation:
If the wobble operation is enabled (F07.00 = 1), the inverter will operate in the preset operating
parameter mode (see explanation of Group F07) to implement wobble operation.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―41―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

5.2 Operating Instructions

5.2.1 Display Panel Description
The standard HD30 inverter is installed with LED display panel, as shown in Figure 5-1.

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

PRG JOG

SHF ENT

RUN STOP

Figure 5-1 Display panel of standard HD30 inverter

There are keys on the display panel and their functions, as shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Key function description

Key Name Function

PRG Program/exit key Entry or exit programming key

JOG Jog key In the mode of display panel control, jog start the inverter

RUN Run key

In the mode of display panel control, press this key to run the
inverter

STOP Stop/reset key

In the mode of display panel control, to stop the inverter and
reset the fault

Multi-function key Set certain function by F00.12

Increment key Increase value or parameter

Decrement key Decrease value or parameter

SHF shift key Selecting display parameter and shift bit

ENT enter/confirm
Enter lower menu or confirm saving the data
key

―42― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
The display panel of the HD30 inverter consists of 5 status indicators and 5 unit indicators. The
indicators and their display status meanings are as shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Indicator description of the display panel

Mark Name Description

Lighting: Indicate the inverter is forward running at the moment

Forward status
FWD Flashing: Indicate the start of the inverter is forward running next
indicator
time
Lighting: Indicate the inverter is reverse running at the moment
REV Reverse status
Flashing: Indicate the start of the inverter is reverse running next
indicator
time
Lighting: Indicate the inverter is faulty at the moment
ALM Alarm status indicator
Lightless: Indicate the inverter is well at the moment

Remote/local status Lighting: Indicate the inverter isn’t in display panel control mode
LO/RE
indicator Lightless: Indicate the inverter is in display panel control mode

Password locked Lighting: Indicate the user password lock of the inverter is avail
LOCK
status indicator Lightless: Indicate there is no user password or unlocked
Lighting: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is Hz
Frequency unit Flashing: Output frequency status display at the stop or run
Hz 5
indicator situation
Lightless: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is not Hz
Lighting: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is A
A Current unit indicator
Lightless: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is not A
Lighting: The unit of the current function parameter or status
display parameter is V
V Voltage unit indicator
Lightless: The unit of the current function parameter or status
display parameter is not V
Lighting: The unit of the present function parameter or status is
rpm
Rotary speed unit Flashing: Running rotatry speed status display at the stop or run
RPM
indicator situation
Lightless: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is not rpm
Lighting: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is %
% % unit indicator
Lightless: The unit of the present function parameter or status
display parameter is not %

The indicator has three statuses: Lightless, lighting, flashing statuses are shown as following:
It means lightless indicator; It means lighting indicator; It means flashing indicator.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―43―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
The display panel of the HD30 inverter has five LED displays and their meanings are shown as
Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 LED display description

LED display Meaning LED display Meaning LED display Meaning LED display Meaning

0 A J U

1 b L u

2 C n y

3 c o －

4 d P Point

5 E q Full display

6 F r No display

Flash
7 H S
modifiable

8 h T

9 i t

5.2.2 Display Status

The display panel of the HD30 inverter can display the parameters at stopping, running, editing,
alarming and special state.
Parameter displayed status at stopping
When the inverter stops operating, the display panel will display stopping status parameter and
the unit indicator will display the parameter’s unit, as shown in Figure 5-2. Other parameters can
be displayed by pressing (defined by parameter F18.08－F18.13).
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-2 Display status of the display panel

―44― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Parameter displayed status at running
When the inverter is running, the display panel will display running status parameter and the unit
indicator will display the parameter’s unit, as well as the status indicator will display the inverter
status, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Other parameters can be displayed by pressing (defined by parameter F18.02－F18.07).
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-3 Display status of the display panel

Four-level menu switching operation
The display panel of the HD30 inverter uses four-level menu configuration for parameter setting
or other operations.
Configuring mode can be displayed in 4-level menu: mode setting(first-level)→function
parameter group setting(second-level)→function parameter setting(third-level)→parameter
setting (fourth-level). The operation process is shown in Figure 5-4 and the description of the
keys is shown in Table 5-4. 5
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG

Hz A V RPM % PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Stopping status First-level menu First-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % PRG

Second-level menu Second-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % PRG Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Fourth-level menu Third-level menu Third-level menu

Figure 5-4 Four-level operation process

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―45―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Table 5-4 Switching four-level description of the key

Key First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu

Fault, return to faulty
display; Fault
PRG cleared, return to
Return to first-level Return to Do not save the current value
menu second-level menu and return to third-level
run/stop status
display.
Enter to second-level Enter to third-level Enter to fourth-level Save the current value and
menu menu menu return to third-level
Modify the internal
Select function Modify No. function.
No. of function group. Modify function value.
group. Increase by 1 when
Increase by 1 Increase by 1 according to
Cycle according to press this key one
according to the the present modified bit
d-F-P-U-y time
current modified bit
Modify the internal
Select function Modify No. function.
No. of function group. Modify function value.
group. Decrease by 1
Decrease by 1 Decrease by 1 according to
Cycle according to when press this key
according to the the present modified bit
y-U-P-F-d one time
current modified bit
Switch units, ten thousands,
Invalid Invalid Switch units and tens
thousands, hundreds, tens

Function parameter editing status

At stop, run or fault alarm status, press PRG to enter function parameter editing status (see the
description of parameter F01.00 and the user password unlock and modify of section 5.2.3), as
shown in Figure 5-5.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-5 Parameter editing status

Fault alarm status
If the inverter detects a fault signal, the display panel will enter the fault alarm status and flashing
display the fault code, as shown in Figure 5-6.
You can enter Group F20 (F20.21－F20.37) to check the fault history.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-6 Fault alarm status

―46― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
The inverter can be reset by pressing STOP
key, or by sending the reset commands via the
control terminal or communication reset port.
Special display status
The special display status includes the setting and unlocked password status, upload and
download parameter, power on initialization, parameter auto-tuning, display panel self-check and
restored factory settings, as shown in Figure 5-7.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Unlock password success Clear password success Set password success

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Downloading parameters Uploading parameters Download parameters error

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

5
Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Power on initialization Display panel self-check success Parameter auto-tuning

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Power on initialization Display panel self-check error Restore factory setting

Figure 5-7 Special display status

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―47―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
5.2.3 Display Panel Operation Examples
Function parameter setting
For example: To modify the setting value of the function parameter F02.14 from 000.00Hz to
012.00Hz, as shown in Figure 5-8.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Fourth-level menu Shift to units

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Shift to tens Modify 0 to 2

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Modify 0 to 1 Third-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

PRG PRG

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Stopping status First-level menu Second-level menu

Figure 5-8 Function parameter setting
In the setting fourth-level menu situation, if the parameter is not flashing, it indicates that this
parameter can’t be modified. The possible reasons are as follows:
• The function parameter can’t be modified, such as the actual detected parameters or recorded
parameters etc.
• Only when the inverter stops can it modify the function parameter.
• Only input the correct password can it edit the function parameter due to the valid password.

―48― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Switching display parameters at stop status
There are six stop parameters(F18.08－F18.13) of the HD30 inverter. For example, set the
parameter to be default value and the Figure 5-9 describes the operation of displaying
parameters.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Setting frequency DC bus voltage AI1 input voltage

F18.08 = 7 F18.09 = 18 F18.10 = 20
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Output terminal status Input terminal status AI2 input voltage

F18.13 = 44 F18.12 = 43 F18.11 = 22
Figure 5-9 Switching display parameters at stop status
Unlock user’s password
When user set F01.00 to non-zero value, by pressing the PRG key to exit to stop/run display
status or by detecting that there is no press on the display panel within 5 minutes, the user’s 5
password will be valid. The LOCK status indicator of the display panel is lighting at the moment.
The operation of the unlock user’s password is as shown in Figure 5-10 which takes 4 as the
user’s password.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Fourth-level menu Input correct password

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

1.5 seconds later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Unlock password success

Figure 5-10 Operation of unlocking user’s password

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―49―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Modify user’s password
If no password, directly modify the value of F01.00 according to Figure 5-11. Otherwise, you
should unlock the password according to Figure 5-10. When it successfully displays “F01.01”,
you can set a new password according to Figure 5-11 which takes“02004” as the new password.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Shifting Modify password’s units

1.5 s
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Modify password’s thousands Modify password success Third-level menu

Figure 5-11 Operation of modifying user’s password
Clear user’s password
If there is password, you should unlock according to Figure 5-10. When it successfully displays
“F01.01”, you can clear the user’s password according to Figure 5-12.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Third-level menu Fourth-level menu

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

1.5 seconds later

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Third-level menu Clear password success

Figure 5-12 Operation of clearing user’s password

―50― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 5 Operation Instructions
Display panel self-test
The display panel of the HD30 series Inverters has self-test function which facilitates periodic
inspection for itself and keys.
I the self-checking function can be enabled by pressing and simultaneously.
The process of the display panel self-test:
1. In stop status, press and simultaneously for 2－3 seconds, the 5-bit LED will
cyclically display “8.” from left to right in turn for three times which is as shown in Figure 5-13.
Later, the indicator will be cyclically bit by bit clockwise lighting from the first upper left for three
times.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Figure 5-13 Starting display of the display panel self-checking

2. Press any key of the display panel and watch the LED and the status indicators to detect the
corresponding key is valid. And the correct correspondence is as shown in Figure 5-14.
In this process, if there is no press within 4－5 seconds, it will directly jump to step 4. If the
self-test makes it, it will jump to step 3.
5
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

PRG JOG

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

RUN STOP

Figure 5-14 Correct correspondence of the keys and the displays

3. If the self-test is success, the display panel will display “PASS” and all keys are valid. The
“PASS” will auto-disappear 3－5 seconds later and back to display status before self-test.
4. If the self-test is failure, the panel will display “FAiL”. The “FAiL” will auto-disappear 3－5
seconds later and back to display status before self-test.
The reason may be: Exceed 5 seconds without a pressing key or invalid pressing keys.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―51―

Chapter 5 Operation Instructions Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Upload and download parameters
Upload:
When set the function parameter F01.03 = 1/2 (upload the setting value of current function code
to the display panel EEPROM storage parameter 1/2), the display panel will display “UPLd”.
When the upload is finished, the display panel will jump to display next function code F01.00.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM %

Uploading parameters
Figure 5-15 Display uploading parameter
Download:
When set the function parameter F01.02 = 2/3(download the display panel EEPROM storage
parameter 1/2 to the setting value of current function code) or F01.02=5/6 (downloaded functional
parameter includes the motor parameter), the display panel will display “dnLd”. When the
download is finished, the display panel will jump to display next function code F01.03.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Downloading parameters Download parameters error

Figure 5-16 Display downloading parameter

Note:
1．When downloading parameters, it displays “dFAiL” which represents that the EEPROM
storage parameters of display panel and the function parameters of current inverter do not match.
First, you need upload the setting value of the correct function code to the EEPROM of display
panel, and then you can download.
2．When upload or download parameters, the display panel is flashing to display “E0022” which
represents that the EEPROM of display panel is fault. It will jump to next function code for 10
seconds later. The troubleshooting is in Chapter 7 (Page 123).

5.3 Initial Power On

It need carefully check before power is on. Please wire the inverter according to specifications
supplied by this manual.
After checking the wiring and mains supply voltage, switch on the circuit breaker and the inverter
will be initialization. The display panel will display as shown in Figure 5-17.
FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK FWD REV ALM LO/RE LOCK

Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM % Hz A V RPM %

Firstly displaying initialization Then displaying Finish inverter initialization

Figure 5-17 Display initialing display panel

―52― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Chapter 6 Function Introduction

This chapter will provide user with detail function introduction of each group.
Display Parameters:
Group d00 Status Display Parameters (on pages 54－59)
General Function Parameters:
Group F00 Basic Parameter (on pages 59－62)
Group F01 Protection of Parameters (on pages 62－64)
Group F02 Run/Stop Control Parameters (on pages 64－68)
Group F03 Acceleration/Deceleration Parameters (on pages 68－70)
Group F04 Process PID Control (on pages 70－72)
Group F05 External Reference Curve Parameters (on pages 72－74)
Group F06 MS SPEED and Simple PLC (on pages 74－78)
Group F07 Wobble Operation Parameters (on pages 78－80)
Group F08 Asynchronous Motor 1 Parameters (on pages 80－82)
Group F09 V/f Control Parameters (on pages 82－85)
Group F10 Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters (on pages 85－86)
Group F11 Reserved
Group F12 Reserved
6
Group F13 Asynchronous Motor 2 Parameters (on pages 86－88)
Group F14 Reserved
Group F15 Digital I/O Terminal Parameters (on pages 89－102)
Group F16 Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters (on pages 102－106)
Group F17 SCI Communication Parameters (on pages 106－107)
Group F18 Display Control Parameters (on pages 107－109)
Group F19 Function-boost Parameters(on pages 109－116)
Group F20 Protection of Fault Parameters (on pages 116－119)
Group F21 Reserved
Group F22 Reserved
Group F23 PWM Control Parameters (on pages 120－120)
User Setting Parameters:
Group U User Menu Mode Display Parameters（on pages 121－122）
Manufacturer Function Parameters (on page122)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―53―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

6.1 Group d: Display Parameters

Group d is status display parameters. The users can directly check the status parameters by
checking the function code of Group d.

6.1.1 Group d00 Status Display Parameters

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
d00.00 Series of the inverter 【Actual value】
Display the series of the inverter.
d00.01 Software version of the control board 【Actual value】
Display the software version of the control board.
d00.02 Reserved
d00.03 Special software version of the control board 【Actual value】
Display the special software version of the control board.
d00.04 Reserved
d00.05 Software version of the display panel 【Actual value】
Display the software version of the display panel.
d00.06 Customized series No. 【Actual value】
Display the customized series No.
d00.07 Motor and control mode 【Actual value】
Display the current motor and the control mode.

Units: Display the current driving motor

• 0: Motor 1.
• 1: Motor 2.

Tens: Control mode

• 0: V/f contorl without PG.
• 1: Reserved.
• 2: Vector control without PG.
d00.08 Rated current of the inverter 【Actual value】
Display the rated current of the inverter.
d00.09 Extension function of the inverter 【Actual value】
Display the extension function of the inverter.
0: Standard inverter.

―54― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

d00.10 Inverter status 【Actual value】
Display the inverter status, as shown in the following table:
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Zero speed running
Forward/reverse Run/stop Inverter fault
0: In non-zero speed
Units 0: Forward 0: Stop 0: No fault
runing
1: Reverse 1: Run 1: Fault
1: In zero speed running
DC braking Bit1&Bit0:
0: Non-DC braking Acceleration/deceleration/constant
Tens Reserved
status 00: Constant 01: Acceleration
1: In DC braking 11: Constant 10: Deceleration
Speed limiting
Parameter
value
auto-tuning
Hundreds Reserved 0: Not in the Reserved
0: No auto-tuning
limiting
1: Auto-tuning
1: In the limiting
Current
Stall overvoltage
limiting
Thousands Reserved Reserved 0: In
0: In
1: Not in
1: Not in
123
d00.11 Master setting frequency source 【Actual value】
Display the master setting frequency source, see parameter F00.10.
d00.12 Master setting frequency 【Actual value】 6
Display the master setting frequency.
d00.13 Auxiliary setting frequency 【Actual value】
Display the auxiliary setting frequency.
d00.14 Setting frequency 【Actual value】
Display the target setting frequency.
d00.15 Reference frequency (after acceleration/deceleration) 【Actual value】
Display the reference frequency for the change of the acceleration/deceleration.
d00.16 Output frequency 【Actual value】
Display the output frequency.
d00.17 Setting RPM 【Actual value】
Display the setting RPM.
d00.18 Running RPM 【Actual value】
Display the running RPM.
d00.19 Three-phase power supply input sequence phase 【Actual value】
Display the sequence phase of the three-phase input.
• 0: Positive sequence: L1(R) preceding L2(S) preceding L3(T).
• 1: Negative sequence: L1(R) preceding L3(T) preceding L2(S).

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―55―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

d00.20 Output voltage 【Actual value】
Display output voltage.
d00.21 Output current 【Actual value】
Display output current.
d00.22 Reserved
d00.23 Output torque 【Actual value】
Display output torque which is the relative percentage of the motor rated torque.
d00.24 Output power 【Actual value】
Display the present actual output power whose unit is 0.1kW.
d00.25 DC bus voltage 【Actual value】
Display DC bus voltage.
d00.26 Potentiometer input voltage of the display panel 【Actual value】
Display potentiometer input voltage of the display panel.
d00.27 AI1 input voltage 【Actual value】
Display AI1 input voltage.
d00.28 AI1 input voltage (after disposal) 【Actual value】
Display A1 input voltage which is disposed by the gain, bias, analogue curve and filter.
d00.29 AI2 input voltage 【Actual value】
Display AI2 input voltage. When AI2 selects current input, the corresponding relations are: 0V
corresponds to 0mA and 10.00V corresponds to 20mA.
d00.30 AI2 input voltage (after disposal) 【Actual value】
Display A2 input voltage which is disposed by the gain, bias, analogue curve and filter.
d00.31 AI3 input voltage 【Actual value】
Display AI3 input voltage.
• Selecting HD30-EIO, the AI3 corresponds to the AI3 of HD30-EIO. When AI3 selects current
input, the corresponding relations are: 0V corresponds to 0mA and 10.00V corresponds to 20mA.
• Selecting HD30-PIO, the AI3 corresponds to the channel one of HD30-PIO. When the channel
one selects current input, the corresponding relations are: 0V corresponds to 0A and 24.00V
corresponds to 1A.
d00.32 AI3 input voltage (after disposal) 【Actual value】
Display A3 input voltage which is disposed by the gain, bias, analogue curve and filter.
d00.33 AI4 input voltage 【Actual value】
Display AI4 input voltage.
• Selecting HD30-EIO, the AI4 corresponds to the AI4 of HD30-EIO.When AI4 selects current input,
the corresponding relations are: 0V corresponds to 0mA and 10.00V corresponds to 20mA.
• Selecting HD30-PIO, the AI4 corresponds to the channel two of HD30-PIO. When the channel two
selects current input, the corresponding relations are: 0V corresponds to 0A and 24.00V
corresponds to 1A.
d00.34 AI4 input voltage (after disposal) 【Actual value】
Display A4 input voltage which is disposed by the gain, bias, analogue curve and filter.
d00.35 DI6 terminal pulse input frequency 【Actual value】
Display DI6 terminal pulse input frequency(Hz).

―56― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

d00.36 AO1 output 【Actual value】
Display AO1 output. When AO1 selects current output, the corresponding relations are: 0V
corresponds to 0mA and 10.00V corresponds to 20mA.
d00.37 AO2 output 【Actual value】
Display AO2 output. When AO2 selects current output, the corresponding relations are: 0V
corresponds to 0mA and 10.00V corresponds to 20mA.
d00.38 High-speed output pulse frequency 【Actual value】
Display high-speed output pulse frequency(Hz).
d00.39 Heatsink temperature 【Actual value】
Display heatsink temperature.
d00.40 Setting line speed 【Actual value】
Display the setting line speed.
d00.41 Reference line speed 【Actual value】
Display the reference line speed.
d00.42 Reserved
d00.43 Reserved
d00.44 Process PID reference 【Actual value】
Display process PID reference relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.45 Process PID feedback 【Actual value】
Display process PID feedback relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.46 Process PID tolerance 【Actual value】
Display process PID tolerance relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
6
d00.47 Process PID integral item 【Actual value】
Display process PID integral item relative to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.48 Process PID output 【Actual value】
Display process PID output to full scale (10.00V) percentage.
d00.49 External counting value 【Actual value】
Display external counting value.
d00.50 Input terminal status 【Actual value】
Display input terminal status. Each bit(binary) of this function parameter stands for different physical
sources which are in the below table.
• 0: The multi-function input terminals are disconnected with corresponding common terminals.
• 1: The multi-function input terminals are connected with corresponding common terminals.
Hundreds Tens Units
Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - - DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will the DI7－DI9 be enabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―57―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

d00.51 Output terminal status 【Actual value】
Display output terminal status. Each bit(binary) of this function parameter stands for different physical
sources which are in the below table.
• 0: The multi-function output terminals are disconnected with corresponding common terminals.
• 1: The multi-function output terminals are connected with corresponding common terminals.
Tens Units
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - RLY4 RLY3 RLY2 RLY1 DO2 DO1

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will the RLY2－RLY4 be enabled.

d00.52 MODBUS communication status 【Actual value】
Display MODBUS communication status.
0: Normal.
1: Communication timeout.
2: Incorrect data frame head.
3: Incorrect data frame checking.
4: Incorrect data frame content.
d00.53 Actual length 【Actual value】
d00.54 Total length 【Actual value】
d00.53 displays actual length; d00.54 displays total length.
d00.55 Total time at power-on 【Actual value】
d00.56 Total time at operation 【Actual value】
d00.55 display total time at power-on; d00.56 displays total time at operation. The unit is hour.
d00.57 High bit of motor total energy consumption 【Actual value】
d00.58 Low bit of motor total energy consumption 【Actual value】
Display the high bit (d00.57) and the low bit (d00.58) of the motor total energy consumption.
d00.59 High bit of energy consumption at this time running 【Actual value】
d00.60 Low bit of energy consumption at this time running 【Actual value】
Display the high bit (d00.59) and the low bit (d00.60) of energy consumption at this time running.
d00.61 Present fault 【Actual value】
Display the present fault.
• Displaying 100 means the undervoltage.

―58― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

6.2 Group F: General Function Parameters

6.2.1 Group F00 Basic Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F00.00 Reserved
F00.01 Motor 1 control mode selection 0－2【0】
0: V/f control without PG. Constant voltage/frequency ratio control.
• It is specially applicable for occasions when one inverter drives more than one motors to
achieve proper efficiency.
• When select V/f control, please properly set the V/f control parameter of Group F09 or Group
F13 to achieve proper efficiency.
1: Reserved.
2: Vector control without PG. Sensorless vector control.
• It is applicable for application with high requirement on inverter performance and torque.
• At first, it must perform motor parameter auto-tuning. And then adjust the settings of F08.00－
F08.04 according to the nameplate of the motor. Start the motor parameter auto-tuning function
and properly set Group F10 parameters, so as to achieve excellent vector control efficiency.
F00.02 Inverter type setting 0,1【0】
0: G type, to drive heavy and general motor.
1: P type, to drive pump and fan.
F00.03 Motor selection 0,1【0】
0: Motor 1.
1: Motor 2.
Note: It can preset two group motor parameters. At stop they can shift even without input
parameters when they are respectively driving two motors. 6
F00.04 HD30 general extension option selection 0－3【0】
0: Option is invalid.
1: HD30-EIO is valid.
2: Reserved.
3: HD30-PIO is valid.
Note: The extension function can be used with the corresponding option.
F00.05 HD30 extension application function 0,1【0】
0: No extension application.
F00.06 Inverter maximum output frequency 50.00－400.00【50.00Hz】
It defines the highest frequency that the inverter is allowed to output.
• It should be careful to set reasonable parameters according to the nameplate of the motor and the
actual operating conditions.
F00.07 Upper limit of operation frequency setting source 0－2【0】
It defines the highest frequency that the user is set to operate, and select different setting sources to
set the upper limit frequency by F00.07.
0: Digital setting. Set the upper limit frequency by F00.08.
1: Analogue input AI setting. See Group F16.
2: Terminal pulse setting. F16.17 sets the max. pulse input frequency according to F00.06 (inverter
max. output frequency).

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―59―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F00.08 Upper limit of operation frequency 0.00－F00.06【50.00Hz】
When F00.07 = 0, the upper limit frequency is set by F00.08.
F00.09 Lower limit of operation frequency 0.00－F00.08【0.00Hz】
Use F00.09 to limit the actual output frequency. When the setting frequency value is bigger than the
zero frequency threshold (F19.10) but smaller than F00.09, it will operate at lower limit frequency.
• Please properly set the parameters according to the nameplate of the motor and actual operating
conditions.
• No limitation on the motor parameter auto-tuning function.
• Besides the lower and upper limit of frequency, the inverter’s running frequency is also limited by
the parameter settings of start/stop DWELL frequency (F02.02, F02.14), zero frequency threshold
(F19.10), stop DC braking starting frequency (F02.16) and skip frequency (F05.17, F05.18,
F05.19) etc.
F00.10 Frequency setting sources selection 0－4【0】
0: Display panel digital setting. Change the value by pressing the or key of the display panel.
Initial value is set by F00.13.
1: Terminal digital setting. Change the value by using the terminals UP/DN. F00.13 sets initial value.
2: SCI communication setting. Chang the setting frequency by SCI communication frequency
command.
• The initial value of the SCI communication frequency is 0.
3: AI analogue setting. It is set by the analogue input voltage.
• See Group F16.
• The corresponding relationship between the analogue value of AI1 and the inverter’s running
frequency setting is refered to Group F05.
4: Terminal pulse setting. It is set by the terminal pulse DI6.
• The specification of input pulse signal: voltage range: 15－30V; frequency range: 0－50.0kHz.
• Refered to Group F05 for the corresponding relationship between the pulse terminal frequency
and the inverter’s running frequency setting.
F00.11 Command setting source selection 0－2【0】

0: Display panel running source. Start and stop the inveter by pressing the key RUN , STOP , JOG .
1: Terminal running source. Start and stop by using the corresponding external terminals.
• External terminal FWD (multi-function terminal is set to 2), REV (multi-function terminal is set to
3), JOGF1 (multi-function terminal is set to 20), JOGR1 (multi-function terminal is set to 21),
JOGF2 (multi-function terminal is set to 22), JOGR2 (multi-function terminal is set to 23). For
more information please see Group F15.
2: SCI communication running source. Start and stop by SCI communication port according to
communication protocol.
F00.12 Function selection of the multi-function key 0－2【2】
0: Switch the display panel running direction. Switch the display panel running direction by key.
• When F00.11 = 0, it is valid. Do not save when power is off.
1: Switch local and remote control. Switch the local and remote control by key.
• When F00.11 = 0 or 1, it is valid.
2: The multi-function key is invalid.
F00.13 Starting frequency digital setting 0.00－upper limit【50.00Hz】
When F00.10 = 0 or 1, F00.13 start to set the initial frequency value.

―60― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F00.14 UP/DOWN digital setting control 000－111【1001】
Only when F00.11 = 0 or 1 will it be valid.
• The current setting frequency value will be replaced by a new one when the value of the F00.13
has be changed by the parameter setting.
Units: Frequency setting save selection at power outage
• 0: Frequency setting will not be saved at power outage.
• 1: Frequency setting will be saved to F00.13 at power outage.

Tens: Frequency setting control selection at stop

• 0: Frequency setting will not be restored to F00.13 at stop.
• 1: Frequency setting will be restored to F00.13 at stop.

Hundreds: Communication setting frequency storage selection

• 0: Do not save when power is off.
• 1: Save to F00.13 when power is off.

Thousands: Switch the frequency channel to the analogue selection

• 0: Do not save.
• 1: Save the frequency set by display pane.
F00.15 Jog operation frequency digital setting 1 0.00－upper limit【5.00Hz】
F00.16 Interval of jog operation 0.0－100.0【0.0s】
After cancel the jog command, the inverter Frequency
will not respond to the jog command at the Jog operation
interval of jog operation set by F00.16. frequency 6
• After the interval of jog is completed, it
immediately execute the arrived jog
Acc. Dec. Time
command. As show in figure.
F00.16
Jog command

Time

F00.17 Operation direction selection 0,1【0】

0: The same as run command.
1: Opposite to run command.
F00.18 Anti-reverse operation 0,1【0】
This function will be valid when F00.11 = 0,1,2.
0: Reverse operation is permitted.
1: Reverse operation is prohibitted. It can respond the forward/ reverse operation commands. When
the analogue value is set to positive/negative voltage and the negative voltage corresponding to the
reverse frequency, the inverter will run in accordance with the zero-frequency run.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―61―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F00.19 Dead time of direction switch 0.0－3600.0【0.0s】
Frequency
F00.19 defines the dead time of direction switch, namely, F00.19
the time of zero-frequency output in the process of Forward Time
0
direction switch shown as the right figure. Reverse

F00.20 Key enable of optional display panel 0,1【0】

0: Enabled. When the inverter connects to two display panels, the keys of optional display using the
communication port can be operated.
1: Invalid. When the inverter connects to two display panels, the keys of optional display using the
communication port can not be operated.
F00.21 Dormant function selection 0,1【0】
0: Disabled. This function is invalid.
1: Enabled. At the running state, when the preset frequency ≤lower limit of operation frequency
(F00.09), the inverter coasts to stop and go into dormant state.
F00.22 Dormancy wake up time 0.0－360.0【0.0s】
When the inverter is at the dormancy state, and the preset frequency ＞lower limit of operation
frequency (F00.09), and the duration achieves the time of F00.22 setting, then the inverter wakes up
from dormancy state, and start at the mode of F02.00 setting.

―62― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.2 Group F01 Protection of Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F01.00 User’s password 00000－65535【00000】
XXXXX: To enable the password protection function, set any non-zero number as the password.
• Once the password is set, if you want to change any parameter you must input correct password.
Otherwise, all the parameters cannot be changed but only read.
• When input correct password, by pressing the PRG key to exit to stop/run display status or by
detecting that there is no press on the display panel within 5 minutes, the user’s password will be
valid. It is necessary to input correct password if you want to change parameters. It will restart
when there is no press on the display panel within 5 minutes.
00000: The factory setting of F01.00 is 00000, namely the password protection function is disabled.
• If the user unlocks the password, it means clearing the user’s password.
• To unlock, change and clear the user’s password, see section 5.2.3.
F01.01 Menu mode selection 00－11【10】
Units:
0: Full menu mode. All function parameters can be displayed in this menu.
1: Checking menu mode. Only different from factory setting parameters can be displayed.

Tens:
0: Does not lock the parameter mapping relationship of Group U and Group F.
1: Lock the parameter mapping relationship of Group U and Group F.
F01.02 Function code parameter initialization (download) 0－6【0】
0: No operation. The inverter is in regular parameter read/write status. Display panel
• Whether can change the parameter it depends on the user’s Download
password status and the actual operating conditions. Display panel stored 6
function parameter
1: Restore to factory settings.
F01.02=2/3/5/6
• Except F01.00, F01.02, F01.03, Group F08, F13.01－F13.15,
HD30
F19.15, F19.19, F19.24, F20.08, F20.09, F20.21－F20.37,
F23.00 and Group y.
• Operation steps: If set F01.02 = 1, press to ensure and the parameters are restored to
factory settings. The display panel dispalys “rESEt”. Then the display panel will display
parameters in stop status after finish restoring to factory setting.
2: Download the display panel EEPROM parameter 1 to the current function code settings.
3: Download the display panel EEPROM parameter 2 to the current function code settings.
4: Clear fault information. The fault history of F20.21－F20.37 will be clear.
5: Download the display panel EEPROM parameter 1 to the current function code settings (including
the motor parameters).
6: Download the display panel EEPROM parameter 2 to the current function code settings (including
the motor parameters).
F01.03 Display panel EEPROM parameter initialization (upload) 0－2【0】
0: No operation. The inverter is in regular parameter read/write status. Display panel
1: Upload the current function code settings to the display panel Upload
EEPROM parameter 1. HD30 present setting
2: Upload the current function code settings to the display panel function parameter
EEPROM parameter 2. F01.03=1/2
Note: F01.00, F01.02, F01.03, F20.21－F20.37 and Group y do not HD30
upload or download.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―63―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.3 Group F02 Run/Stop Control Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F02.00 Start mode selection 0－2【0】
0: From the DWELL frequency to start.
• Refer to F02.02 and F02.03 parameters for the start DWELL frequency.
• The starting DWELL frequency (F02.02) still works during the process of direction switch, as
following. F02.03 (starting DWELL frequency retention time) is enabled when reverse.

Frequency

F02.02
F02.01 Forward F00.19 F02.03 Time
0
F02.03
F02.02 Reverse
F00.19: dead time of direction switch
1: Brake first and then start from DWELL frequency.
• Refer to F02.04 and F02.05 parameters for the DC braking.
• Starting DC braking is enabled only in the process from the stop status to running status. But it
is disabled in the process of direction switch, as shown in the figure. There is no F02.05 (DC
braking time) when reverse.

Frequency
F02.02
F02.01 F02.05 Forward F00.19 F02.03 Time
0
F02.03
F02.02 Reverse
F00.19: dead time of direction switch

2: Start after speed tracking. If the result of Power supply

speed tracking is smaller than F02.02, it will Run reverse
without load
start from the starting DWELL frequency. Motor’s speed

• The inverter automatically searches Inverter’s

and catches the motor’s running output frequency
direction and speed, and starts the
rotating motor smoothly without Inverter’s
impact. As the right figure. running direction
Reverse
• This mode is enabled only in the Detect the motor’s
process from stop status to running speed and direction
status. But it is disabled in the process
of direction switch.

―64― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F02.01 Starting delay time 0.00－10.00【0.00s】
When the inverter receives the run command, it will wait for the delay time set by F02.01 and then
start running.
F02.02 Start DWELL frequency setting 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
F02.03 Retention time of starting DWELL frequency 0.00－10.00【0.00s】
F02.02 defines the DWELL frequency of the inverter at start. Frequency
F02.03 is the retention time of starting DWELL frequeny Setting frequency
(F02.02) refers to the hold time when the inverter in the
starting process.
F02.02 F02.03
Time
• The start should be delayed according to F02.01 setting
when the starting command is enabled. Then start
according to F02.00 setting mode.
• Only when F02.00 = 0 or 1 will F02.02 and F02.03 be
enabled.
• Set F02.02 or F02.03 as 0, the starting DWELL
frequency is disabled.
F02.04 DC braking current setting 0－100(inverter’s rated
current)【50%】
F02.05 DC braking time at start 0.00－60.00【0.50s】
F02.04 is a percentage of the inverter’s rated Output frequency
current. To set the current value of the DC
Running frequency
braking at start and at stop.

• If setting is higher than fivefold of motor’s

6
rated current, the injection current value
Output voltage Time
is fivefold of the motor’s rated current. (effective value)
• The DC braking current is valid to both
start and stop DC braking. DC braking value

Time
F02.05 = 0.0s, there is no DC braking F02.05
process at start. Run command
• Only when F02.00 = 1 will F02.05 be
enabled.
F02.06 Speed tracking mode selection 0,1【0】
0: Searching based on residual voltage.
• The inverter injects certain frequency’s voltage to the motor and starts speed searching
according to F02.08 setting.
1: Searching based on current.
• The inverter injects current to the motor according to F02.08 setting and starts speed searching
according to F02.07 setting.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―65―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F02.07 Speed search mode based on current 0,1【1】
0: From the max. output frequency to start speed searching.
1: From the stopping frequency to start speed searching.
F02.08 Setting reference current for speed search 0－100(motor’s rated
current)【50%】
Set the motor injection current.
F02.09 Acc./Dec. time of the speed search 1.0－50.0【5.0s】
Frequency rate of decline follows the deceleration time at speed searching. F02.06 = 1 (speed
searching based on current) is enabled.
F02.10 Waiting time of speed search 0.1－5.0【1.0s】
The start should wait for a time according to F02.10 setting when the starting command is enabled.
Then start speed searching.
F02.11 V/f ratio of speed search 0.0－100.0【100.0%】
V/f ratio of speed search = F02.11 × motor’s rated voltage / motor’s rated frequency.
F02.12 Disposal time after speed search 0.01－5.00【1.00s】
Complete the establishment of the time from searching the frequency to output the voltage in speed
search process.
F02.13 Stop mode selection 0－2【0】
0: Decelerate to stop. After the stop command is received, the inverter reduces its output frequency
according to the deceleration time. When the frequency decreases to F02.14 and holds on a time
F02.15 set, it will stop.
• Refer to the parameter F02.14 and F02.15 in the figure.
1: Coast to stop. After the stop command is received, the inverter stops output immediately and the
motor stops under the effects of mechanical inertia.
2: Decelerate to stop with DC braking. After the stop command is received, the inverter reduces its
output frequency according to the deceleration time and starts DC braking when its output frequency
reaches F02.16 setting frequency.
• Refers to parameter F02.16－F02.18 in the figure for the DC braking at stop.
• Refers to parameter F03.00－F03.08 for the deceleration time.
F02.14 DWELL frequency setting at stop 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
F02.15 Retention time of DWELL frequency at stop 0.00－10.00【0.00s】
F02.14 defines inverter’s DWELL frequency at Frequency
stop. Setting frequency
F02.15 is a holding time DWELL frequency at stop
(F02.14) in inverter stop process. F02.15

F02.14
• Only when F02.13 = 0 will it be enabled. Time
• Set F02.14 or F02.15 as 0, DWELL frequency
at stop is disabled.

―66― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F02.16 DC braking initial frequency at stop 0.00－50.00【0.50Hz】
F02.17 DC braking waiting time at stop 0.00－10.00【0.00s】
F02.18 DC braking time at stop 0.00－60.00【0.50s】
F02.17 is the interval from A to B in the right Output frequency
figure during deceleration stop process. Running frequency
• The inverter has no output during the
waiting time. By F02.17 setting the F02.16 A
Time
waiting time, the current overshoot in
the initial stage (point B in the figure ) Output voltage
of braking can be reduced when the (effective value)
inverter drives a high power motor.
DC braking value
• By F02.04 setting the DC braking B
A Time
current at stop.
F02.18 = 0.00s, there is no DC braking
F02.17 F02.18
process at stop. Run command
• Only when F02.13 = 2 will F02.16－
A: running frequency reaches F02.16
F02.18 be enabled. B: start to apply DC braking value

F02.19 Jog control mode 0,1【0】

0: The jog functions of start and stop mode etc are invalid.
1: The jog functions of start and stop mode etc are enabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―67―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.4 Group F03 Acceleration/Deceleration Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F03.00 Acceleration/Deceleration mode selection 0,1【0】

Frequency
0: Linear acceleration or deceleration. Output
frequency increases or decreases according F00.06
to the constant slope, as shown in figure.

0
Acc. time Dec. time Time

Frequency
1: S-curve acceleration or deceleration. F00.06
Output frequency increases or decelerases T1：F03.11
according to the S-curve. T2：F03.12
• Refer to F03.11－F03.14 about the T3：F03.13
corresponding parameters of S-curve. T4：F03.14

In the figure:
0
• T5 is the setting acceleration time.
T1 T2 T3 T4 Time
• T6 is the setting deceleration time. T5 T6
• T7 is the actual acceleration time. T7 T8
• T8 is the actual deceleration time.
F03.01 Acceleration time 1 0.1－6000.0
F03.02 Deceleration time 1 【15kW and below
F03.03 Acceleration time 2 inverter: 10.0s】
F03.04 Deceleration time 2 【18.5－55kW
F03.05 Acceleration time 3 interter :30.0s】
F03.06 Deceleration time 3 【75kW and above
F03.07 Acceleration time 4 inverter: 60.0s】

F03.08 Deceleration time 4

Acceleration time is the time that the inverter’s output frequency accelerates from 0 Hz to F00.06 (the
max-output frequency) in the linear form.
Deceleration time is the time that the inverter’s output frequency decelerates from F00.06 (the
max-output frequency) to 0 Hz in the linear form.
• It can only choose one of the acceleration time or the deceleration time.
• Refer to the figure of parameter F03.00.

―68― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F03.09 Switching frequency of acceleration time 2 and time 1 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
When the running frequency is smaller than the F03.09 setting, it will accelerate according to
acceleration time 2; Otherwise it will accelerate according to acceleration time 1.
• When use terminals to select acceleration/deceleration time (set multi-function terminal as
number 26 and 27 function), F03.09 is disabled.
F03.10 Switching frequency of deceleration time 2 and time 1 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
When the running frequency is smaller than the F03.10 setting, it will decelerate according to
deceleration time 2; Otherwise it will decelerate according to deceleration time 1.
• When use terminals to select acceleration/deceleration time (set multi-function terminal as
number 26 and 27 function), F03.10 is disabled.
F03.11 S-curve characteristic time at starting acceleration 0.00－2.50【0.20s】
F03.12 S-curve characteristic time at ending acceleration 0.00－2.50【0.20s】
F03.13 S-curve characteristic time at starting deceleration 0.00－2.50【0.20s】
F03.14 S-curve characteristic time at ending deceleration 0.00－2.50【0.20s】
Refer to the figure of parameter F03.00.
F03.15 Acceleration time of jog operation 0.1－6000.0【6.0s】
F03.16 Deceleration time of jog operation 0.1－6000.0【6.0s】
F03.15 and F03.16 define the acceleration/deceleration time of jog operation.
F03.17 Deceleration time of emergency stop 0.1－6000.0【10.0s】
It defines the deceleration time of emergency stop.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―69―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.5 Group F04 Process PID Control
Closed-loop can be constituted not only by analogue reference and feedback but also by pulse
reference and feedback. Generally, the process PID control mode is used to regulate on-site
pressure, liquid level and temperature etc.
The maximum analogue input or maximum pulse input frequency (F16.17) corresponds to the
maximum output frequency (F00.06). The process PID control is shown in the following figure:
Reference value + Bias Closed-loop control Amplitude Output
PID Output filter
limit characteristics limit control
-
Feedback value

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F04.00 Process PID control selection 0,1【0】
0: PID control is disabled.
1: PID control is enabled.
F04.01 Reference source selection 0－2【0】
0: Digital reference. It is the value of F04.03 reference.
1: AI analogue reference. It is the value of the analogue input voltage AI reference, and refer to Group
F16.
2: Terminal pulse reference. It is the value of the terminal pulse input reference, and maximum input
pulse frequency corresponding to 10V of the PID reference.
F04.02 Feedback source selection 0,1【0】
0: AI analogue feedback.
1: Terminal pulse feedback.
F04.03 Setting digital reference -10.00－10.00/0.00－24.00
【0.00V】
It defines the process PID regulator reference. When F04.01 = 0 (digital reference), it is enabled.
• When F00.04 = 3 (HD30-PIO function enable), the setting range is 0.00－24.00V.
• When F00.04 is set to other values (HD30-PIO function is disabled), the setting range is -10.00－
10.00V.
F04.04 Proportional gain (P) 0.00－10.00【2.00】
F04.05 Integral time (I) 0.01－10.00【1.00s】
F04.06 Integral upper limit 0.00－upper limit【50.00】
F04.07 Differential time (D) 0.00－10.00【0.00s】
F04.08 Differential amplitude limit value 0.00－upper limit【20.00】
F04.09 Sampling cycle (T) 0.01－50.00【0.10s】
F04.04, F04.05 and F04.07 define the process PID parameters.
F04.06 defines the process PID integral upper limit.
F04.08 defines the process PID differential amplitude limit value.
F04.09 defines the sampling cycle of feedback value and the PID regulator calculates once in each
sampling cycle.
• When F04.07 = 0, the differential is disabled.

―70― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F04.10 Bias limit 0.0－20.0 (reference)
【2.0%】
F04.10 defines the maximum deviation of the
Feedback value
output from the reference closed-loop. F04.10
Reference value
• PID regulator stops operation when the
feedback value is within this range.
• Setting this parameter correctly is Time
instructive to improve the system output
accuracy and stability.
Output frequency

Time

F04.11 PID regulator upper limit source selection 0－2【0】

0: Set by F04.13.
1: Set by AI analogue value. Set by analogue input voltage AI and refer to Group F16.
2: Set by terminal pulse input.
F04.12 PID regulator lower limit source selection 0－2【0】
It defines the setting source of PID regulator lower limit value.
0: Set by F04.14.
1: Set by AI analogue value. Set by analogue input voltage AI and refer to Group F16.
2: Set by terminal pulse.
F04.13 PID regulator upper limit value 0.00－upper limit【50.00Hz】
It defines that the process PID regulator output digital setting value of upper limit.
6
F04.14 PID regulator lower limit value 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
It defines that the process PID regulator output digital setting value of lower limit.
F04.15 PID regulator characteristic 0,1【0】
0: Positive. The motor RPM is required to increase with the increase of the reference.
1: Negative. The motor RPM is required to decrease with the increase of the reference.
F04.16 Integral regulation selection 0,1【0】
0: Stop integral regulation when the frequency reaches the upper or lower limit.
1: Continue the integral regulation when the frequency reaches the upper or lower limit.
• It is recommended to disable the integral regulation when the frequency reaches the upper or
lower limit on condition that fast response is needed.
F04.17 PID output filter time 0.01－10.00【0.05s】
It defines the filtering time of process PID output.
F04.18 PID output reverse selection 0,1【0】
0: PID regulation disable reverse. When PID output is negative, 0 is the limit.
1: PID regulation enable reverse. When F00.18 = 1 (disable reverse), 0 is the limit.
F04.19 PID output reverse frequency’s upper limit 0.00－upper limit【50.00Hz】
It defines the PID upper limit frequency when reverse. When F04.18 = 1 (PID regulation enable
reverse), it is enabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―71―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.6 Group F05 External Reference Curve Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F05.00 External reference curve selection 00000－22222【00000】
Units: AI1 characteristic curve selection.
Tens: AI2 characteristic curve selection.
Hundreds: AI3 characteristic curve selection.
Thousands: AI4 characteristic curve selection.
Ten thousands: Pulse input characteristic curve selection.
Each bit setting:
• 0: Line 1.
• 1: Line 2.
• 2: Polyline.
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO can hundreds and thousands be enabled.
F05.01 Minimum reference of line 1 0.0－F05.03【0.0%】
F05.02 Minimum reference corresponding value of line 1 0.0－100.0【0.0%】
F05.03 Maximum reference of line 1 F05.01－100.0【100.0%】
F05.04 Maximum reference corresponding value of line 1 0.0－100.0【100.0%】
F05.05 Minimum reference of line 2 0.0－F05.07【0.0%】
F05.06 Minimum reference corresponding value of line 2 0.0－100.0【0.0%】
F05.07 Maximum reference of line 2 F05.05－100.0【100.0%】
F05.08 Maximum reference corresponding value of line 2 0.0－100.0【100.0%】
F05.09 Maximum reference of polyline F05.11－100.0【100.0%】
F05.10 Maximum reference corresponding value of polyline 0.0－100.0【100.0%】
F05.11 Inflection point 2 reference of polyline F05.13－F05.09【100.0%】
F05.12 Inflection point 2 corresponding value 0.0－100.0【100.0%】
F05.13 Inflection point 1 reference of polyline F05.15－F05.11【0.0%】
F05.14 Inflection point 1 corresponding value 0.0—100.0【0.0%】
F05.15 Minimum reference of polyline 0.0－F05.13【0.0%】
F05.16 Minimum reference corresponding value of polyline 0.0－100.0【0.0%】
F05.01－F05.04 define the line 1. F05.05－F05.08 define the line 2. F05.09－F05.16 define the
polyline.
• Line 1, line 2 and polyline can independently achieve positive and negative characteristics as
shown in following figure.
• If set the curve’s minimum reference the same as maximum reference, it must be a line. The
default frequency is the corresponding frequency of the curve minimum reference.
Positive and negative characteristics of line
Reference corresponding value Reference corresponding value
F05.04 F05.02
F05.08 F05.06

F05.02 F05.04
F05.06 F05.08
F05.01 F05.03 P/A(reference) F05.01 F05.03 P/A(reference)
F05.05 F05.07 F05.05 F05.07

―72― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

Positive and negative characteristics of polyline
Reference corresponding value Reference corresponding value
F05.10 F05.16
Inflection point 2
Inflection point 1
F05.12 F05.14
F05.14 F05.12 Inflection point 2

Inflection point 1
F05.16 F05.10

F05.15 F05.13 F05.11 F05.09 P/A(reference) F05.15 F05.13 F05.11 F05.09 P/A(reference)
In the figure:
• P/A is terminal pulse/ analogue reference.
• Pulse frequency P is 100％ corresponding to F16.17 maximum input pulse frequency.
• Analogue input value (A) is 100% corresponding to 10V or 20mA.
F05.17 Skip frequency 1 F00.09－upper limit
F05.18 Skip frequency 2 【0.00Hz】
F05.19 Skip frequency 3
F05.20 Range of skip frequency 0.00－30.00【0.00Hz】
The setting of skip frequency is for
the inverter’s output frequency to Setting frequency after adjusted
avoid resonance with the load.
F05.19
• The inverter will skip the above
frequencies as shown in figure.
Up to 3 skip frequency ranges F05.18 6
can be set. Skip range

F05.17
Setting frequency

• During the process of acceleration/ deceleration, the inverter will run with countinous frequency
output, ignoring the skip frequency ranges. But the inverter will not run at constant speed in the
skip frequency ranges.
• Frequency setting is uncontinuous, while frequency output is continuous.
F05.21 Jog operation frequency digital setting 2 0.00－upper limit【5.00Hz】
When select jog operation 2 through terminal, set the jog frequency operation according to F05.21.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―73―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.7 Group F06 MS SPEED and Simple PLC
Simple PLC function enables the inverter to change its running frequency and direction
automatically according to PLC parameter settings.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F06.00 Multi-step frequency command 1 F00.09－upper limit【3.00Hz】
F06.01 Multi-step frequency command 2 F00.09－upper limit【6.00Hz】
F06.02 Multi-step frequency command 3 F00.09－upper limit【9.00Hz】
F06.03 Multi-step frequency command 4 F00.09－upper limit【12.00Hz】
F06.04 Multi-step frequency command 5 F00.09－upper limit【15.00Hz】
F06.05 Multi-step frequency command 6 F00.09－upper limit【18.00Hz】
F06.06 Multi-step frequency command 7 F00.09－upper limit【21.00Hz】
F06.07 Multi-step frequency command 8 F00.09－upper limit【24.00Hz】
F06.08 Multi-step frequency command 9 F00.09－upper limit【27.00Hz】
F06.09 Multi-step frequency command 10 F00.09－upper limit【30.00Hz】
F06.10 Multi-step frequency command 11 F00.09－upper limit【33.00Hz】
F06.11 Multi-step frequency command 12 F00.09－upper limit【36.00Hz】
F06.12 Multi-step frequency command 13 F00.09－upper limit【39.00Hz】
F06.13 Multi-step frequency command 14 F00.09－upper limit【42.00Hz】
F06.14 Multi-step frequency command 15 F00.09－upper limit【45.00Hz】
They define the initial value of each step speed in multi-step speed mode and PLC operation mode.
F06.15 Simple PLC control selection 0,1【0】
0: No PLC operation.
1: Enabling PLC operation. It need reset the value of F06.16－F06.46 according to actual operation.

―74― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F06.16 Simple PLC operation mode selection 0000－1122【0000】
There are 4 parameter settings: units (0－2), tens (0－2), hundreds (0,1), thousands (0,1).

Units: PLC operation mode selection (taking 15-step PLC for example)
• 0: Stop after single cycle operation. The inverter stops automatically after one operating cycle. It
will start only after receiving the run command next time.
f3 f13
f2 f12
f4 f11 f14
f1 f15
f5 f10 Stop
f9
f6
f8
f7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

Run command
• 1: Maintain the final value after single cycle of PLC operation. The inverter will maintain the run
frequency and direction of the last step after completing one operating cycle.
f3 f13
f2 f12
f4 f11 f14
f1
f5 f15 Maintaining
f10
f9
f6
f8
f7 6
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

Run command

• 2: Cycle operation. The inverter will operate with a new cycle from Step 1 automatically after
completing one operating cycle until receiving the stop command.
Operating with a new cycle
f3 f13 automatically
f2 f12
f4 f11 f14
f1 f1
f5 f15
f10
f9
f6 Stop
f8
f7
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T1

Run command

Stop command

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―75―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

Tens: PLC operation restart mode selection after pause
• 0: Start from step 1. Intermitting signal
• If the inverter stops during PLC Output freq. f3
operation due to the stop command,
f2
fault or power failure, the PLC
operation will start from the Step 1 f4
next time. f5
• 1: Continue to operate from the step 0
where the inverter pauses. T3 T41 T42 T5 Time

• If the inverter stops during PLC Output freq.

f3
operation due to the stop command or
fault, it will record the uptime. f2
• When it restarts, the inverter will Pause freq. f4
continue operation from the step f5
where it pauses as shown in figure. 0
• 2: Continue to operate at the frequency T3 T41 T42 T5 Time
when the inverter pauses. T41 = the operated time T42 = the rest
• When the inverter stops during PLC operation due to the stop command or fault, it will record
not only the operated time but also the current frequency.
• It will continue to operate at the recorded frequency upon restart, as shown in figure.
Note: The difference between Mode 1 and Mode 2 is that Mode 2 also memorizes the running
frequency when the inverter pauses, and the inverter will continue to operate at the frequency
upon restart.

Hundreds: Save the PLC status after power failure

• 0: Not save. The PLC running status will not be saved after power failure and start running from
Step 1 next time.
• 1: Save. The operating parameters of PLC operation, including the operating step, operating
frequency and operating time of this step,etc, can be saved. The inverter will continue to operate
in accordance with the PLC operation restart mode selection after pause (defined by tens of
F06.16).
Thousands: time unit selection of the PLC step
• 0: Second (s).
• 1: Minute (m).
F06.17 Setting of PLC step 1 000－321【000】
F06.19 Setting of PLC step 2 000－321【000】
F06.21 Setting of PLC step 3 000－321【000】
F06.23 Setting of PLC step 4 000－321【000】
F06.25 Setting of PLC step 5 000－321【000】
F06.27 Setting of PLC step 6 000－321【000】
F06.29 Setting of PLC step 7 000－321【000】
F06.31 Setting of PLC step 8 000－321【000】
F06.33 Setting of PLC step 9 000－321【000】
F06.35 Setting of PLC step 10 000－321【000】
F06.37 Setting of PLC step 11 000－321【000】
F06.39 Setting of PLC step 12 000－321【000】
F06.41 Setting of PLC step 13 000－321【000】
F06.43 Setting of PLC step 14 000－321【000】

―76― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F06.45 Setting of PLC step 15 000－321【000】
F06.17, F06.19, F06.21, F06.23, F06.25, F06.27, F06.29, F06.31, F06.33, F06.35, F06.37, F06.39,
F06.41, F06.43, F06.45 are used to configure the running frequency, the direction, acceleration and
deceleration time of every PLC step.

Units: PLC running frequency selection

• 0: Multi- step frequency command. The absolute value of each step frequency is the same as the
setting of multi-step frequency.
• Example: the absolute value of running frequency in PLC Step 15 is the setting value of F06.14.
• 1: Depend on F00.10. The running frequency source selectes the reference by F00.10 selection.

Tens: Operation direction selection of PLC at different steps

• 0: Forward.
• 1: Reverse.
• 2: Depend on run command. The motor’s operation direction can be alternated via external
direction command.
• If the direction is not set, the inverter will run in the direction according to last step.

Hundreds: Acceleration/deceleration time selection of PLC at different steps

• 0: Acceleration/deceleration time 1.
• 1: Acceleration/deceleration time 2.
• 2: Acceleration/deceleration time 3.
• 3: Acceleration/deceleration time 4.
F06.18 Running time of step 1 0.0－3276.7【5.0】
6
F06.20 Running time of step 2 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.22 Running time of step 3 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.24 Running time of step 4 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.26 Running time of step 5 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.28 Running time of step 6 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.30 Running time of step 7 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.32 Running time of step 8 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.34 Running time of step 9 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.36 Running time of step 10 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.38 Running time of step 11 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.40 Running time of step 12 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.42 Running time of step 13 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.44 Running time of step 14 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.46 Running time of step 15 0.0－3276.7【0.0】
F06.18, F06.20, F06.22, F06.24, F06.26, F06.28, F06.30, F06.32, F06.34, F06.36, F06.38, F06.40,
F06.42, F06.44, F06.46 define the running time of PLC at different steps.
• When set the running time to 0 at some step, it means that the PLC function of this step is
disabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―77―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.8 Group F07 Wobble Operation Parameters
The wobble operation process is shown as below:
First, the inverter accelerates to the preset frequency of wobble operation (F07.02) within the
acceleration time and then waits for certain time (F07.03). Hinterher the inverter transits to the
central frequency of the wobble operation as per the acceleration time, and ultimately start wobble
operation according to the preset wobble amplitude (F07.04), jump frequency (F07.05), wobble
cycle (F07.06) and the rise time of wobble operation (F07.07) until it receives a stop command and
stops as per the deceleration time.
The process is shown in figure:

Running frequency
Amplitude Fw = Fset x F07.04
FH = Fset + Fw
Upper limit of frequency FH

Central frequency Fset

Lower limit of frequency FL FL = Fset - Fw

F07.02
Jump freq. = Fw x F07.05

Acc. F07.03 Dec.time Time

time
F07.06
Rising time: F07.06 x F07.07
Run command

Stop command

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F07.00 Wobble operation selection 0,1【0】
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

―78― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F07.01 Wobble operation mode 0000－1111【0000】
Units: Start mode of wobble operation.
• 0: Auto start. The inverter will first operate at the preset frequency of wobble operation (F07.02) for
certain time (F07.03), and then enter wobble mode automatically.
• 1: Manual start. If the multi-function terminal is set as No.36 function (set as wobble start function)
and the signal is enabled, the inverter will enter wobble mode. If the terminal is disabled, the
inverter will end wobble operation and operate at the preset frequency of wobble operation
(F07.02).

Tens: Wobble operation amplitude. Refer to parameter F07.04.

• 0: Relative to the wobble central frequency.
• 1: Relative to the maximum output frequency.
Hundreds: Restart mode of wobble operation.
• 0: The inverter restarts the wobble operation as per the recorded frequency and direction when it
stops last time.
• 1: The inverter restarts the wobble operation from 0 Hz.

Thousands: Save the wobble operation parameters at power outage

• 0: Saved. When the hundreds of F07.01 is set as 0, the wobble operation parameters will be
saved when power outage occurs.
• 1: Not be saved.
F07.02 Preset wobble frequency 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
F07.03 Holding time of preset wobble frequency 0.0－999.9【0.0s】
F07.02 defines the inverter’s running frequency before entering wobble mode.
6
F07.03 defines the time that the inverter operates at the preset wobble frequency.
• Only when select auto start (set units of F07.01 as 0) will F07.03 be enabled.
F07.04 Wobble amplitude 0.0－50.0【0.0%】
Relative to central frequency: FW = central frequency × F07.04.
• Wobble central frequency is the frequency value set by F00.10 (frequency reference source).
Relative to maximum output frequency: FW = maximum output frequency F00.06 × F07.04.
F07.05 Jump frequency 0.0－F07.04【0.0%】
The setting is the percentage of wobble amplitude. There is not jump frquency if set as 0.
F07.06 Wobble operation cycle 0.1－999.9【10.0s】
F07.06 defines a complete cycle of wobble operation including rising and falling processes.
F07.07 Rising time of triangle wave 0.0－100.0【50.0%】
Relative to wobble operation cycle of the F07.06, F07.07 defines the rising and the falling time of
wobble operation and their unit is s.
• Rising time of wobble operation ＝ F07.06 × F07.07.
• Falling time of wobble operation ＝ F07.06 × (1 - F07.07).

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―79―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.9 Group F08 Asynchronous Motor 1 Parameters
R1 Ll R2 Ll

I1 I2
1-S
R2
S
U1
Io

Lm

R1 = F08.07 (Stator resistance) Ll = F08.09 (Leakage inductance)

R2 = F08.08 (Rotor resistance) Lm = F08.10 (Mutual inductance)
Io = F08.11 (Idling exciting current) S = Slip ratio

The idling exciting current (F08.11) can be calculated by the motor’s rated current (F08.02) and
motor’s power factor (F08.05) or detected by motor auto-tuning (F08.06 = 2).
The relationship between rated torque current, idling exciting current and motor’s rated current is
below:
Rated torque current = F08.05 × F08.02

Idling exciting current F08.11 = �1 − F08.052 × F08.02

F08.01
Mutual inductance F08.10 = − F08.09
2√3π × F08.03 × F08.11
Note: Except F08.03, F08.04 and F08.06, the other factory settings are depended on the inverter’s model.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 0.2－500.0kW
F08.01 Rated voltage of motor 1 0－999V
F08.02 Rated current of motor 1 5.5kW above motor 0.1－999.9A
5.5kW and below 0.01－99.99A
motor
F08.03 Rated frequency of motor 1 1.0－400.0【50.0Hz】
F08.04 Rated RPM of motor 1 1－24000【1500rpm】
F08.03 and F08.04 should be set in accordance with the parameters of motor nameplate.
F08.05 Power factor of motor 1 0.001－1.000

―80― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F08.06 Parameter auto-tuning of motor 1 0－2【0】
0: Auto-tuning is disabled.
1: Stationary auto-tuning.
• In the process of stationary auto-tuning, the motor is at rest. The stator resistance, rotor
resistance and leakage inductance will be measured and written into F08.07, F08.08 and
F08.09 automatically.
2: Rotary auto-tuning.
In process of rotary auto-tuning, the motor is at rest at the beginning, and the stator resistance,
rotor resistance and leakage inductance will be measured. Hinterher the motor will start
rotating, accordingly mutual inductance and idling exciting inductance will be measured
automatically. All the measured values above will be saved respectively in F08.07, F08.08,
F08.09, F08.10 and F08.11.
• When the motor is in rotating status, oscillation, even overcurrent, might occur. In this case,
please press the STOP key to stop auto-tuning and then adjust the F09.15
(oscollation-suppression mode) and F09.16 (oscollation-suppression factor) suitably to mitigate
the possible oscillation.
Note: The auto-tuning is enabled only in display panel control mode (F00.11 = 0).
Auto-tuning procedures:
1. Input correctly the motor parameters as per its nameplate (F08.00－F08.04).
2. When F08.06 is set as 2, please set the proper acceleration time 1 (F03.01) and deceleration time 1
(F03.02) and make sure the motor is disconnected with the load for security.
3. Set F08.06 as 1 or 2 firstly, then press the key, and therewith press RUN key to start
auto-tuning. The LED will display “tunE”.
4. When the RUN indicator is flashing, it indicates that auto-tuning has been completed. At this time,
the inverter displays the parameters of stop status and F08.06 resets to 0. 6
F08.07 Stator resistance of motor 1 5.5KW above motor 0.000－9.999Ω
5.5KW and below 0.00－99.99Ω
motor
F08.08 Rotor resistance of motor 1 5.5KW above motor 0.000－9.999Ω
5.5KW and below 0.00－99.99Ω
motor
F08.09 Leakage inductance of motor 1 5.5KW above motor 0.00－500.00mH
5.5KW and below 0.0－5000.0mH
motor
F08.10 Mutual inductance of motor 1 5.5KW above motor 0.00－500.00mH
5.5KW and below 0.0－5000.0mH
motor
F08.11 Idling exciting current of motor 1 5.5KW above motor 0.0－999.9A
5.5KW and below 0.00－99.99A
motor
F08.12 Reserved
F08.13 Reserved
F08.14 Reserved

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―81―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.10 Group F09 V/f Control Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F09.00 V/f curve selection of motor 1 0－4【0】
It defines flexible V/f setting modes so as to meet Output voltage
requirements of different load characteristics.
F08.01
• Four preset curves and one user-defined
0
curve can be selected according to the setting
2
of F09.00.
3
1
0: Line. Shown as curve 0 in figure.
1/3 x F08.01
1: Square curve. Shown as curve 1 in the figure.
2: 1.2 exponential curve. Shown as curve 2 in the 0
figure. 1/3 x F08.03 F08.03 Output freq.
3: 1.7 exponential curve. Shown as curve 3 in the
figure.
4: User-defined curve.
F09.01 V/f frequency value F3 of motor 1 F09.03－F08.03【0.00Hz】
F09.02 V/f voltage value V3 of motor 1 F09.04－F08.01【0V】
F09.03 V/f frequency value F2 of motor 1 F09.05－F09.01【0.00Hz】
F09.04 V/f voltage value V2 of motor 1 F09.06－F09.02【0V】
F09.05 V/f frequency value F1 of motor 1 0.00－F09.03【0.00Hz】
F09.06 V/f voltage value V1 of motor 1 0－F09.04【0V】
F09.01－F09.06 is the user-definable V/f curve. Voltage

F08.01
• If F09.00 = 4 (user-definable curve), F09.06 is
F09.02 V3,F3
enabled.
V2,F2
• The V/f curve can be defined by connecting 3 F09.04
points of (V1, F1), (V2, F2) and (V3, F3), to
adapt to special load. F09.06 V1,F1
• According to the actual operation, set proper
curve to meet the requirements of load 0
characteristics. F09.05 F09.03 F09.01 F08.03 Frequency

―82― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F09.07 Torque boost of motor 1 0.0－30.0
【45kW and below inverter: 2.0%】
【55－132kW inverter: 1.0%】
【160kW and above inverter: 0.5%】
F09.08 Cut-off point used for manual torque boost of motor 1 0.0－50.0（F08.03）【30.0%】
In order to compensate the torque drop at low Voltage
frequency, the inverter can boost the voltage so F08.01
as to boost the torque.
• No matter what kind of V/f curve is set by Boosted value
F09.00, the torque boost is enabled.
If F09.07 = 0, auto torque boost is enabled. Voltage of manual
• If F09.07 is set as non-zero, manual torque torque boost
boost is enabled.
0
F09.08max F08.03 Frequency
F09.08 is relative to percentage of motor’s rated
F09.08max = 50% F08.03
frequency (F08.03).
F09.09 Slip compensation gain of motor 1 0.0－300.0【100.0%】
F09.10 Slip compensation filter time of motor 1 0.01－10.00【0.10s】
F09.11 Slip compensation limitation of motor 1 0.0－250.0【200.0%】
F09.12 Compensation constant of motor 1 0.1－25.0s【2.0s】
The motor’s slip changes with the load torque, which results in the variance of motor speed. Through
slip compensation (the inverter will automatically adjust its output frequency according to the load
torque) to reduce the influence.
• In driving status (the actual speed is lower than the Slip 6
setting speed) and in generating status (the actual
Positive slip
speed is higher than the setting speed), the slip compensation
compensation gain (F09.09) should be increased
gradually.
• The value of auto slip compensation depends on the -100%
motor’s rated slip, consequently make sure the motor’s 100% Load
rated frequency (F08.03) and rated speed (F08.04) are
set correctly.
Negative slip
Range of slip compensation = Slip compensation limit compensation
(F09.11) × Rated slip.
Rated slip = F08.03 - F08.04 × Np / 60.
• Np is the number of the motor pole pairs.
F09.13 Reserved

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―83―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F09.14 AVR (automatic voltage regulation) function of motor 1 0－2【1】
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled all the time.
2: Disabled in deceleration process.
• The output voltage can be regulated to maintain constant via AVR. Thus, normally the AVR
function should be enabled, especially when the input voltage is higher than the rated voltage.
• In deceleration process, if the F09.14 = 0 or F09.14 = 2, the running current will be a little higher;
while if the F09.14 =1, the motor will decelerate steadily and the current will be smaller.
F09.15 Oscillation-suppression mode of motor 1 0,1【0】
0: Oscillation suppression is dependent on the motor’s exciting current component.
1: Oscillation suppression is dependent on the motor’s torque current component.
F09.16 Oscillation-suppression coefficient of motor 1 0－200【50】
This function is used to damp oscillation when output current is continually unstable.
• This function helps to keep the motor running smoothly through correctly adjusting the setting of
F09.16.
F09.17 Reserved
F09.18 Reserved

―84― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.11 Group F10 Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F10.00 Speed control proportional gain 1 of motor 1 0.1－200.0【20.0】
F10.01 Speed control integral time 1 of motor 1 0.00－10.00【0.20s】
F10.02 Speed control proportional gain 2 of motor 1 0.1－200.0【20.0】
F10.03 Speed control integral time 2 of motor 1 0.00－10.00【0.200s】
F10.04 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 1 of motor 1 0.00－50.00【10.00Hz】
F10.05 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 2 of motor 1 0.00－50.00【15.00Hz】
The parameters of F10.00－F10.05 and F10.07 comfirm the PID parameters of automatic speed
regulator (ASR). The structure of ASR is shown in figure.
Torque current
Frequency command + Error reference
PID
-
Frequency feedback
Torque limit
As the right figure: PI parameter
• When the inverter operates with frequency in a range F10.00 /
of 0－F10.04, the PI parameters of vector control are F10.01
F10.00 and F10.01;
• When the inverter operates with frequency above the
value of F10.05, the PI parameters of vector control
F10.02 /
are F10.02 and F10.03;
F10.03
• When the inverter operates with frequency in a range
of F10.04－F10.05, P is the linear interpolation 0 F10.04 F10.05 Frequency
between F10.00 and F10.02, while I is the linear
interpolation between F10.01 and F10.03. 6
• The system’s response can be expedited through increasing the ASR proportional gain P, but
oscillation may occur if the value of P is too high.
• The system’s response can be expedited through increasing the ASR integral constant Ti, but
oscillation and high overshoot happen easily if the value of Ti is too high.
• If Ti =0, the integral function is disabled and the speed-loop works only as a proportional
controller.
• Generally, the proportional gain P should be adjusted firstly to the maximum on condition that the
system does not vibrate, and then the integral constant Ti should be adjusted to shorten the
response time without overshoot.
• It need increase proportional gain (P) and decrease integral constant (Ti), on condition that shorter
dynamic response time is required during low frequency operation.
F10.06 Speed-loop integral limitation of motor 1 0.0－200.0 (F08.02)【180.0%】
It is used to limit the maximum value of the vector control speed-loop integral.
F10.07 Speed-loop differential time of motor 1 0.00－1.00【0.00s】
It defines the vector control speed-loop differential time.
• Generally, it doesn’t need to set F10.07 except for expediting the dynamic response.
• There is not the speed-loop differential when F10.07 = 0.
F10.08 Speed-loop output filter time of motor 1 0.000－1.000【0.020s】
It is used to filter the output of ASR regulator.
• When F10.08 = 0, the speed-loop filter is disabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―85―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F10.09 Reserved
F10.10 Reserved
F10.11 Motor torque limitation when motor 1 is forward 0.0－200.0 (F08.02)【180.0%】
F10.12 Motor torque limitation when motor 1 is reverse
F10.13 Recreated torque limitation when motor 1 is forward
F10.14 Recreated torque limitation when motor 1 is reverse

6.2.12 Group F11 Reserved

6.2.13 Group F12 Reserved

6.2.14 Group F13 Asynchronous Motor 2 Parameters

This group can be set as the second group of motor parameters and control parameters
corresponding to the first group parameters (motor 1). The concrete meaning refers the
corresponding parameters of motor 1 and achieves flexible switching between the 2 motors (refer
to multi-function input terminal No. 47 function).
Note:
Refer to Group F08 Asynchronous Motor 1 parameters for F13.01－F13.15.
Refer to Group F09 V/f Control parameters for F13.16－F13.34.
Refer to Group F10 Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters for F13.35－F13.49.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F13.00 Control mode selection of motor 2 0－2【0】
0: V/f control without PG.
1: Reserved.
2: Vector control without PG.
F13.01 Rated power of motor 2 0.2－500.0kW【dependent on
inverter model】
F13.02 Rated voltage of motor 2 0－999V【dependent on
inverter model】
F13.03 Rated current of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.1－999.9A【dependent on
motor inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.01－99.99A【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.04 Rated frequency of motor 2 1.0－400.0【50.0Hz】
F13.05 Rated speed of motor 2 1－24000【1500rpm】
F13.04 and F13.05 should be set in accordance with the parameters of motor nameplate.
F13.06 Power factor of motor 2 0.001－1.000【dependent on
inverter model】
F13.07 Parameter auto-tuning of motor 2 0－2【0】

―86― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F13.08 Stator resistance of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.000－9.999Ω【dependent on
motor inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.00－99.99Ω【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.09 Rotor resistance of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.000－9.999Ω【dependent on
motor inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.00－99.99Ω【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.10 Leakage inductance of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.00－500.00mH【dependent
motor on inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.0－5000.0mH【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.11 Mutual inductance of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.00－500.00mH【dependent
motor on inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.0－5000.0mH【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.12 Idling exciting current of motor 2 above 5.5KW 0.0－999.9A【dependent on
motor inverter model】
5.5KW or below 0.00－99.99A【dependent on
motor inverter model】
F13.13 Reserved
F13.14 Reserved
F13.15 Reserved
F13.16 V/f curve selection of motor 2 0－4【0】
6
0: Line.
1: Square curve.
2: 1.2 exponential curve.
3: 1.7 exponential curve.
4: User-defined curve.
F13.17 V/f frequency value F3 of motor 2 F13.19－F13.04【0.00Hz】
F13.18 V/f voltage value V3 of motor 2 F13.20－F13.02【0V】
F13.19 V/f frequency value F2 of motor 2 F13.21－F13.17【0.00Hz】
F13.20 V/f voltage value V2 of motor 2 F13.22－F13.18【0V】
F13.21 V/f frequency value F1 of motor 2 0.00－F13.19【0.00Hz】
F13.22 V/f voltage value V1 of motor 2 0－F13.20【0V】

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―87―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F13.23 Torque boost of motor 2 0.0－30.0
【45kW and below inverter: 2.0%】
【55－132kW inverter: 1.0%】
【160kW and above inverter: 0.5%】
F13.24 Cut-off point used for manual torque boost of motor 2 0.0－50.0 (F13.04)【30.0%】
F13.25 Slip compensation gain of motor 2 0.0－300.0【100.0%】
F13.26 Slip compensation filter time of motor 2 0.01－10.00【0.10s】
F13.27 Slip compensation limitation of motor 2 0.0－250.0【200.0%】
F13.28 Compensation constant of motor 2 0.1－25.0【2.0s】
F13.29 Reserved
F13.30 AVR (automatic voltage regulation) function of motor 2 0－2【1】
F13.31 Oscillation-suppression mode of motor 2 0,1【0】
F13.32 Oscillation-suppression coefficient of motor 2 0－200【50】
F13.33 Reserved
F13.34 Reserved
F13.35 Speed control proportional gain 1 of motor 2 0.1－200.0【20.0】
F13.36 Speed control integral time 1 of motor 2 0.00－10.00【0.20s】
F13.37 Speed control proportional gain 2 of motor 2 0.1－200.0【20.0】
F13.38 Speed control integral time 2 of motor 2 0.00－10.00【0.20s】
F13.39 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 1 of motor 2 0.00－50.00【10.00Hz】
F13.40 Speed-loop PI switching frequency 2 of motor 2 0.00－50.00【15.00Hz】
F13.41 Speed-loop integral limitation of motor 2 0.0－200.0 (F13.03)【180.0%】
F13.42 Speed-loop differential time of motor 2 0.00－1.00【0.00s】
F13.43 Speed-loop output filter time of motor 2 0.000－1.000【0.020s】
F13.44 Reserved
F13.45 Reserved
F13.46 Motor torque limitation when motor 2 is forward 0.0－200.0 (F13.03)【180.0%】
F13.47 Motor torque limitation when motor 2 is reverse
F13.48 Recreated torque limitation when motor 2 is forward
F13.49 Recreated torque limitation when motor 2 is reverse
F13.50 Reserved
F13.51 Reserved
F13.52 Reserved

6.2.15 Group F14 Reserved

―88― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.16 Group F15 Digital I/O Terminal Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F15.00 DI1 terminal function selection 0－86【2】
F15.01 DI2 terminal function selection 0－86【3】
F15.02 DI3 terminal function selection 0－86【0】
F15.03 DI4 terminal function selection 0－86【0】
F15.04 DI5 terminal function selection 0－86【0】
F15.05 DI6 terminal function selection 0－86【0】
F15.06 DI7 terminal (option terminal) function selection 0－86【0】
F15.07 DI8 terminal (option terminal) function selection 0－86【0】
F15.08 DI9 terminal (option terminal) function selection 0－86【0】
0: Reserved. It disables the terminal’s function. The inverter ignores the signal input via this terminal.
• The unwanted terminal is recommended to be set as 0 so as to avoid wrong connection or
action.
1: Inverter enabled.
• When enabled, the inverter is enabled to run;
• When disabled, the inverter is disabled to run and will be in auto stop status.
• If no terminal selects this function, it defaults that the inverter is enabled.
2,3: FWD/REV function. You can set any multi-function terminal for the FWD/REV terminal to control
the inverter’s run and stop.
• When F00.11 = 1 (external terminal reference run command source) or terminal No. 11
function is enabled, FWD/REV function is valid.
• Refer to parameter F15.16.
4: Three-wire operation mode.
• Refer to parameter 15.16.
6
5,6,7: Frequency source selection 1, 2, 3.
• Up to 2n frequency reference sources can be switched through terminal logic combination
setting n (the maximum n is 3). Refer to the below table.
• Up to 8 frequency reference sources can be switched through selecting 3 terminals.
• Up to 4 frequency reference sources can be switched through selecting 2 terminals.
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Selection
0 0 0 Holding
0 0 1 Display panel digital setting
0 1 0 Terminal digital setting
0 1 1 SCI communication digital setting
1 0 0 Analogue value setting
1 0 1 Terminal pulse setting
1 1 X Hold
123

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―89―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

8: The frequency source switch to analogue setting.
• If the setting is 8, the frequency reference source can be forcibly switched to analogue setting.
• The priority of frequency sources is shown below:
AI frequency source > multi-step frequency terminal 1, 2, 3 and 4(multi-function terminal is No.
13, 14, 15, 16 function)> frequency setting terminal 1,2 and 3(multi-function terminal is No.
5,6,7 function) > frequency source defined by F00.10.
9,10: Run command source selection 1, 2.
• In the below table there are 4 kind control modes selected by the different logic combinations of
terminals 1 and 2.
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Selection
0 0 Hold the control mode
0 1 Display panel control mode
1 0 Terminal control mode
1 1 SCI communication control mode

• The inverter can accept that run command source switch changes while running, but only at
stop status all switches can be enabled.
11: Switch to terminal control mode.
• When this terminal function is enabled, the run command source will be forcibly switched to the
terminal control mode.
• The priority of frequency selection is below:
Terminal control mode to be the run command source > Display panel’s M key achieves local
and remote switching function (F00.12 = 1) > Run command source selection terminal 1and 2
(multi-function terminal is No. 9,10 function) > Run command source defined by F00.11.
• The modification of run command source is enabled only at stop.
12: External stop command input.
• When enabled, the inverter stops according to F02.13 (stop mode selection). It is valid for all
command source.

―90― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

13－16: Multi-step frequency terminal 1—4.
• Up to 15 speed references can be set through different logic combinations of terminals.
• The inverter can realise 15-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 4
terminals.
• The inverter can realise 7-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 3 terminals.
• The inverter can realise 3-step speed operation through the logical combinations of 2 terminals.
• The inverter can realise the switch between setting frequency and multi-step frequency through
one terminal function.
• Refer to the below table and figure. K1 is corresponding to terminal 1, K2 is corresponding to
terminal 2, K3 is corresponding to terminal 3 and K4 is corresponding to terminal 4.

K4 K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting
0 0 0 0 Setting frequency
0 0 0 1 Multi-step frequency 1 (F06.00)
0 0 1 0 Multi-step frequency 2 (F06.01)
0 0 1 1 Multi-step frequency 3 (F06.02)
0 1 0 0 Multi-step frequency 4 (F06.03)
0 1 0 1 Multi-step frequency 5 (F06.04)
0 1 1 0 Multi-step frequency 6 (F06.05)
0 1 1 1 Multi-step frequency 7 (F06.06)
1 0 0 0 Multi-step frequency 8 (F06.07)
1 0 0 1 Multi-step frequency 9 (F06.08)
1 0 1 0 Multi-step frequency 10 (F06.09) 6
1 0 1 1 Multi-step frequency 11 (F06.10)
1 1 0 0 Multi-step frequency 12 (F06.11)
1 1 0 1 Multi-step frequency 13 (F06.12)
1 1 1 0 Multi-step frequency 14 (F06.13)
1 1 1 1 Multi-step frequency 15 (F06.14)

Output frequency
f1－f15 corresponds to multi-step frequency 1－15
f3 f13
f2 f12
f4 f11 f14
f1 f15
f5 f10

f6 f9
f8
f7

K1

K2

K3

K4

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―91―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

17,18: Frequency ramp (UP) / (DN).
• If the setting is 17 or 18, the terminal can be used to increase or decrease frequency, and
accordingly enables remote control.
• Increase or decrease rate is determined by F15.12. The function refers to below table.
• This terminal is enabled when F00.10=1 (terminal digital setting) or F19.00=2 (terminal digital
setting).

Up (UP) command Down (DN) command Frequency change trend

0 0 To keep the setting frequency
0 1 To decrease the setting frequency
1 0 To increase the setting frequency
1 1 To keep the setting frequency

19: Clearing auxiliary frequency setting.

• When the setting is 19, this terminal is used to clear the counter to zero, but it is only valid for
digital auxiliary setting.
20,21: Command control input for forward and reverse jog 1 (JOGF1/ JOGR1).
22,23: Command control input for forward and reverse jog 2 (JOGF2/ JOGR2).
24,25: Jog 1 command and direction control input.
• In terminal control mode, if 24 or 25 are enabled, then forward jog or reverse jog operation are
enabled. JOGF is forward jog command and JOGR is reverse jog command.
• It need define parameters F00.15 (jog frequency), F00.16 (jog interval), F03.15 (acceleration
time of jog operation) and F03.16 (deceleration time of jog operation), refering to below table.
Jog direction input Jog command input
Run command
(No. 25 function) (No. 24 function)
0 0 Jog command is invalid
1 0 Jog command is invalid
0 1 Jog 1 forward
1 1 Jog 1 reverse

• Note: When select 20 and 21, the functions 24 and 25 are invalid.
26,27: Acceleration/deceleration time selection terminals 1 and 2.
• Acceleration/deceleration time 1－4 can be selected through logic combination of the terminals
1 and 2, as shown in table.
• The inverter can realise 4 groups Acc./Dec. time selection through the function of 2 Acc./Dec.
terminals.
• The inverter can realise 2 groups Acc./Dec. time selection through the function of 1 Acc./Dec.
terminals.
Acc./Dec. terminal 2 Acc./Dec. terminal 1 Acc./Dec. selection
0 0 Acc./Dec. time 1
0 1 Acc./Dec. time 2
1 0 Acc./Dec. time 3
1 1 Acc./Dec. time 4
123

―92― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

28: Accelereation/deceleration mode selection.
• If the setting is enabled, the S-curve accelereation/deceleration mode will be selected. While
the setting is disabled, linear acceleration/deceleration mode will be selected.
• The acceleration/deceleration mode set by terminal No. 28 function is priority to by F03.00.
29: Acceleration/deceleration prohibition. If the setting is 29, this terminal can make the motor immune
to external signals (except stop command) and maintain operation at the current speed.
• The function is disabled in the process of deceleration to stop.
30: Switch to ordinary running mode.
• When this function is enabled, the frequency command (including MS function, simple PLC
function, process PID function, wobble function etc.) forced to switch to the ordinary mode
operation.
31: Reset the stop status of PLC operation.
• In the stop status of PLC operation, the memorized PLC operating information (operating step,
operating time, operating frequency, etc.) will be cleared when this terminal is enabled, refering
to Group F06.
32: Pausing the process PID.
• If the setting is 32, the process PID function is temporary disabled and the inverter keeps the
present frequency output and continue running.
33: Disabling the process PID. To achieve the flexible switch between the process PID and the lower
class operation mode.
• When enabled, the operation mode switchs to the lower class.
• The priority of operation mode is as: Jog operation > Process PID operation > PLC operation >
wobble operation > MS Speed operation > Operation.
34: Holding PID integral.
• When enabled, the process PID stops increasing and the integrator keeps the present result. 6
35: Clearing PID integral.
• When enabled, the process PID is cleared.
36: Switch to wobble operation. The wobble operation mode selects manual start (set the units of
F07.01 to 1).
• If the setting is 36, the wobble function is enabled.
37: Reset the wobble operating status.
• If wobble operation (set F07.00 to 1) is enabled, connecting this terminal can clear all the
memorised information about the wobble operation no matter the inverter is in auto start or
manual start mode (depend on F07.01 setting).
38: DC braking start while stopping.
• To implement DC braking for the motor in stop status through control terminal and then realise
motor’s emergency stop and accuracy location.
• F02.04 defines the DC braking current.
• Implement DC braking for the motor as soon as this terminal is enabled.
• Only in deceleration stop this function is enabled.
39,40: External pause signal (normally-open/normally-closed input).
• After receiving an external pause command during the running process, the inverter will
immediately stop.
• Once the external signal is removed and the situation meets the running condition, the inverter
will start tracking at high speed.
41,42: Coast to stop (normally-open/normally-closed input).
• The inverter will stop outputting immediately and the load will coast to stop in accordance with
the mechanical inertia when a multi-function terminal is set as 41 or 42.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―93―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

43: Emergency stop.
• After receiving terminal command, the inverter will decelerate to stop during the deceleration
time according to the F03.17 (deceleration time of emergency stop).
44,45: External fault signal (normally-open and normally-closed input).
• If the setting is 44 or 45, the fault signal of external equipment can be input via the terminal,
which is convenient for the inverter to monitor the external equipment and carry out protection
according to the value of F15.17.
• Once the inverter receives the fault signal, it will display external fault.
• The fault signal has two input modes: normally-open and normally-closed input.
46: External reset (RST) input. If the setting is 46, the inverter can be reset via this terminal when it
has a fault.
• Accordingly the terminal has the same function as the STOP key on the display panel.
47: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2.
• When enabled, it can realise parameters of the two motors to switch.
48: Timing function input. If the setting is 48, the inverter can use the timing function input terminal.
• Refer to parameters F15.25 and F15.26.
49: Clearing the length. If the setting is 49, the inverter can use clearing the length input terminal in the
fixed length control.
• Refer to parameters F19.26－F19.34.
50: Clearing the counter to zero. When the setting is 50, this terminal is used to clear the counter to
zero.
• It is normally used with Function 51 (counter’s triggering signal input).
51: Counter’s triggering signal input. It is built-in counter’s couting pulse input port and can save the
current couting value at power loss.
• Pulse’s maximum frequency: 200Hz.
• Refer to parameters F15.37 and F15.38.
52: Length counting input. If the setting is 52, it can be used as length input terminal in the fixed length
control.
• Refer to parameters F19.26－F19.34.
53: Pulse frequency input (only DI6 terminal is enabled). This terminal is used to input pulse signal as
frequency setting.
• See Group F05 parameters for the relationship between input pulse frequency and frequency
setting.
54－84: Reserved.
85: Pausing PLC operation. If the setting is 85, this terminal is used to pause the PLC operation.
• The inverter will operate at the frequency of the current step when the terminal is enabled, and
there is no timing at PLC operation. When disabled, the timing will continue.
86: Terminal stop DC braking.
• After the inverter receives the stop command, if the stop mode is decelerate to stop + DC
braking (F02.13 = 2), and the running frequency is lower than the DC braking initial frequency at
stop (F02.16), the inverter will begin to DC braking.
• The braking current is set by F02.04, and the braking time is the longer time of the terminal
function holding time and the DC braking time at stop (F02.18).
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F15.06－F15.08 be enabled.
F15.09 Reserved
F15.10 Reserved
F15.11 Reserved

―94― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F15.12 Acceleration/deceleration rate of UP/DN terminal 0.00－99.99【1.00 Hz/s】
It defines the change rate of setting frequency via the UP/DN terminal.
F15.13 Terminal detecting interval 0－2【0】
0: 2ms
1: 4ms
2: 8ms
F15.14 Terminal detecting filter number 0－10000【2】
The digital input terminal signal should be delayed and confirmed so as to avoid digital input error.
F15.15 Terminal input positive and negative logic setting 000－0x1FF【000】
It defines that each bit (binary) of this function represents different physical sources.
• Positive logic: When multi-function input terminals are connected to corresponding common port,
this logic is enabled. Otherwise the logic is disabled.
• Negative logic: When multi-function input terminals are connected to corresponding common port,
this logic is disabled. Otherwise the logic is enabled.
Hundreds Tens Units
Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - - DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

• 0 means positive logic while 1 means negative logic.

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will DI7－DI9 be enabled.
F15.16 FWD/REV operation mode 0－3【0】
• FWD can be selected by multi-function input terminal DIx and represented as “FWD”. At this time,
the function of this terminal should be defined as No. 2 function. 6
• REV can be selected by multi-function input terminal DIy and represented as “REV”. At this time,
the function of this terminal should be defined as No. 3 function.
This function defines the four control modes via the external terminals.
0: Two-wire operation mode 1.
1: Two-wire operation mode 2.
• When stop command coming from other sources makes the inverter stopping though the
terminal logic enabled in the terminal control mode, there is no run command even the control
terminal FWD/REV are still valid.
• If you want the inverter to run again, you should trigger the active FWD and REV. For example:
The terminal function set as 12, 41－45 or PLC stop after single cycle.

Run command
K2 K1
P24 Mode 1 Mode 2
SEL 0 0 Stop Stop
K1 FWD 1 0 Reverse Stop
K2 REV 0 1 Forward Forward
COM
1 1 Stop Reverse

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―95―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

2: Three-wire operation mode 1.
• If the shift between SB2 and SB3 is disabled, the inverter will hold the control mode.
3: Three-wire operation mode 2.
• If SB2 changes from enabled into disabled, the inverter will keep the same mode.
• DIi can be selected by the multi-function input terminal DIi. At this time, the function of this terminal
should be defined as No. 4 function of “three-wire operation”.
Three-wire operation mode 1 Three-wire operation mode 2

P24 P24
SEL SEL
SB2 FWD SB2 FWD
SB1 DIi SB1 DIi
SB3 REV K REV
COM COM

SB1：Normally-closed stop button (effective at the falling edge) K：Direction selection button (level on)
K = 0 (forward) K = 1 (reverse)
SB2：Normally-open forward button (effective at the risling edge)
SB1：Normally-closed stop button (effective at the falling edge)
SB3：Normally-open reverse button (effective at the rising edge) SB2：Normally-open run button (effective at the risling edge)

F15.17 Terminal operating selection due to fault of external equipment 0－3【0】

When there is fault of external equipment, it can select protection.
0: Coast to stop.
1: Emergency stop.
2: Decelerate to stop.
3: Continue to run.
F15.18 DO1 terminal function selection 0－35【2】
F15.19 DO2 terminal function selection 0－38【0】
F15.20 RLY1 relay function selection 0－35【31】
F15.21 RLY2 relay (extension relay) function selection 0－35【0】
F15.22 RLY3 relay (extension relay) function selection 0－35【0】
F15.23 RLY4 relay (extension relay) function selection 0－35【0】
0: Reserved. There is no output function and action of the output terminal.
1: Inverter ready. The inverter completes power on and no fault occurs, then it can normally run the
indicating signal.
2: Inverter is running. The inverter is in run status and output indicatiing signal.
3: Inverter is forward running. The inverter is forward running the indicating signal.
4: Inverter is reverse running. The inverter is reverse running the indicating signal.
5: Inverter is DC braking. The inverter is DC braking the indicating signal.
6: Inverter is in zero-frequency status. In the zero-frequency range the inverter’s output frequency
(including in stop status) outputs the indication signal.
• Refer to parameters F15.28 and F15.29.
7: Inverter is in zero-frequency running. In the zero-frequency range the inverter’s output frequency
outputs the indicating signal.
• Refer to parameters F15.28 and F15.29.
8: Reserved.
9,10: Frequency detection threshold (FDT1,FDT2).
• Refer to parameters F15.31－F15.35.

―96― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

11: Frequency arriving signal (FAR). Indication signal will be output when the inverter’s output
frequency is within the FAR range.
• The FAR is set by F15.27 (FAR range).
12: Limitation of upper limit of frequency. The indicating signal will be output if the setting frequency is
beyond the upper limit of frequency.
13: Limitation of lower limit of frequency. The indicating signal will be output if the setting frequency is
lower than the lower limit of frequency.
14: Limitation of upper/lower limits of wobble frequency.
• If the wobble frequency calculated by the central frequency is higher than upper limit of
frequency or lower than the lower limit of frequency (F00.09), signal will be output, as shown in
figure.
• When F07.00 = 1 (using the wobble function), this terminal function is enabled.
Running frequency
Before limiting amplitude
Upper limit of frequency
Wobble frequency
After limiting amplitude
Central frequency
Lower limit of frequency
F00.09

Time

Output signal
Limitation of upper/lower limits of wobble frequency
6
15: Simple PLC operating status indication. The indicating signal will be output when the inverter is at
simple PLC operating.
16: Simple PLC pausing indication. The indicating signal will be output if the simple PLC operation is
suspended by external terminals.
17: Simple PLC cycle completion indication. The indicating signal will be output if one cycle of PLC
operation is finished.
18: Completion of simple PLC operation stages. The indicating signal will be output if the current step
of PLC operation is finished.
19: Completion of simple PLC operation. The indicating signal will be output if the PLC operation is
finished.
20: Output data from SCI communication. Output indicating signal of open collector or relay is
controlled by the SCI communication directly.
21: Preset operating time out.
• The indicating signal will be output if the inverter’s operating time reaches the preset operating
time (F15.36)
Note: The No. 17, 18, 19 and 21 functions output indicating signal which is single pulse signal,
500ms.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―97―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

22: Timing function output. If the setting is 22, the inverter can use the timing function output terminal.
• Refer to parameters F15.25 and F15.26.
23: Preset counting value reach.
24: Indicating counting value reach.
• Refer to parameters F15.37 and F15.38.
25: Setting length arrive. The indicating signal will be output if the inverter’s actual length reaches the
preset length.
26: Indication of motor 1 and motor 2. According to the current motor selection, output corresponding
indicating signal.
• When the inverter controls the motor 1, this signal will be disabled; while controls the motor 2, it
will output the indicating signal.
27,28: Reserved.
29: Undervoltage lock-up signal (LU). When the DC bus voltage is lower than the undervoltage
threshold, the inverter will output undervoltage signal.
• The LED on the display panel will display “-Lu-”.
30: Overload signal (OL). The indicating signal can be output when the inverter’s output current value
is higher than that defined by F20.01(overload pre-alarm detection threshold) and the overload time is
longer than that defined by F20.02 (overload pre-alarm detection time).
31: Inverter fault. The inverter will output fault signal when it has a fault.
32: External fault. The indicating signal can be output when the inverter detects the external fault
signal via terminal.
33: Inverter auto-reset fault. The indicating signal can be output when the inverter is during fault
auto-reset.
34: Three-phase power supply forward input. The indicating signal can be output when the inverter’s
three-phase input power supply is forward.
• Power supply forward: L1 (R) preceding L2 (S) preceding L3 (T).
35: Dormancy instruction function.
36－37: Reserved.
38: High-frequency output (only DO2). DO2 can be selected as high-frequency output.
• Refer to parameter F16.21.
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F15.21－F15.23 be enabled.
F15.24 Output terminal positive and negative logic selection 000－0xFFF【000】
It defines that each bit (binary) of this function represents different physical sources.
• Positive logic: When multi-function output terminals are connected to corresponding common port,
this logic is enabled. Otherwise the logic is disabled.
• Negative logic: When multi-function output terminals are connected to corresponding common
port, this logic is disabled. Otherwise the logic is enabled.
Tens Units
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
- - RLY4 RLY3 RLY2 RLY1 DO2 DO1

Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will RLY2－RLY4 be enabled.

―98― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F15.25 ON side delay time of timing function 0.00－300.00【0.00s】
F15.26 OFF side delay time of timing function
F15.25 and F15.26 can be used to set the ON/OFF side delay time (dead area) of the timing function
output relative to the input.
• The timing function output will be ON when the ON time of timing function is longer than that
defined by F15.25.
• The timing function output will be OFF when the OFF time of timing function delays behind that
defined by F15.26.
The timing function operation figure is shown as follows:
Timing function input ON ON

Timing function output ON ON

F15.25 F15.26 F15.25 F15.26

F15.27 FAR range 0.00－100.00【2.50Hz】

Output
The pulse signal will be output if the inverter’s
output frequency is within the FAR range. As
shown in the right figure. Preset
frequency Detecting range

Time
DO 6

Time
F15.28 Zero-frequency operation threshold 0.00－upper limit【0.00Hz】
F15.29 Zero-frequency hysteresis
Running frequency
F15.28 and F15.29 are used to set the
F15.28
zero-frequency operation output control function, F15.29
please see the right figure.
Time
Running status

Zero-frequency
operation output

Time
Zero-frequency output

Time

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―99―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F15.30 FDT1 detection mode 0,1【0】
0: Detect according to the reference frequency.
1: Detect according to the output frequency.
F15.31 FDT1 level 0.00－upper limit【50.00Hz】
F15.32 FDT1 lag 0.00－upper limit【1.00Hz】

Output frequency
The indicating signal can be output if the setting
frequency F15.30 is higher than certain frequency F15.31
(F15.31), and becomes disabled when the setting F15.32
frequency is lower than certain frequency of FDT1 FL
level (F15.31 - F15.32). Please refer to FL of the
right figure.

Time
DO

FL = F15.31 - F15.32 Time

F15.33 FDT2 detection mode 0,1【0】
0: Detect according to the reference frequency.
1: Detect according to the output frequency.
F15.34 FDT2 level 0.00－upper limit【50.00Hz】
F15.35 FDT2 lag 0.00－upper limit【1.00Hz】
Refer to parameters F15.31 and F15.32.
F15.36 Preset operating time 0－65535【0h】
When the total operating time reaches the preset operating time (F15.36), the inverter will output an
indicating signal (500ms).

―100― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F15.37 Preset counting value arriving F15.38－9999【0】
F15.38 Specified counting value arriving 0－F15.37【0】
F15.37 presents that when the number of pulse input by the multi-function input terminals (set as No.
51 function) reaches a certain quantity, the multi-function output terminals or relay will send an
indicating signal.
F15.38 presents that when the number of pulse input by the multi-function input terminals (set as No.
51 function) reaches a specified quantity, the multi-function output terminals or relay will send an
indicating signal until the pulse number hits the preset counting value.
For instance:
If F15.37 is set to 7 and F15.38 is set to 3, DO1 selects preset count arriving function (F15.18 = 23）,
DO2 selects specified count arriving (F15.19 = 24), and DI1 selects counter trigger signal input
function (F15.00 = 51).
Sequence of counting value arriving is shown in figure:
• DO2 will output an indicating signal when DI1 inputs the third pulse until the preset count value
reachs seven.
• DO1 will output an indicating signal when DI1 inputs the seventh pulse; output signal of DO1
returns to low level when DI1 inputs the eighth pulse.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI1

DO1

DO2
F15.39 Reserved
6
F15.40 Reserved
F15.41 Reserved
F15.42 Reserved
F15.43 Terminal output delay 0.0－100.0【0.0s】

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―101―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.17 Group F16 Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F16.00 Display panel with potentiometer function selection 0－7【0】
Only when using display panel with potentiometer can F16.00 is enabled.
F16.01 Analogue input AI1 function selection 0－7【2】
F16.02 Analogue input AI2 function selection 0－7【5】
F16.03 Analogue input AI3 function selection 0－7【0】
0: Reserved.
1: Upper limit frequency setting source.
• When F00.07 = 1 (upper limit frequency setting source is set by analogue input), the upper limit
frequency will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which
selects this function.
2: Frequency setting source.
• When F00.10 = 3 (frequency setting source is set by analogue input), the setting frequency will
be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this
function.
3: Auxiliary frequency reference.
• When F19.00 = 4 (auxiliary frequency reference is set by AI analogue), the auxiliary frequency
will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this
function.
4: Process PID reference.
• When F04.01 = 1 (process PID reference is set by AI analogue), the process PID reference will
be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this
function.
5: Process PID feedback.
• When F04.02 = 0 (AI analogue inputs process PID feedback), the process PID feedback will be
set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue source which selects this function.
6: Process PID regulating upper limit.
• When F04.11 = 1 (upper limit value of the PID regulator is set by AI analogue), the process PID
regulating upper limit will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue
source which selects this function.
7: Process PID regulating lower limit.
• When F04.12 = 1 (lower limit value of the PID regulator is set by AI analogue), the process PID
regulating lower limit will be set by the input voltage value corresponding to the analogue
source which selects this function.

―102― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F16.04 Analogue input AI4 function selection 0－8【0】
8: Motor overheating signal input.
• Connect electronic thermistor embedded HD30-EIO
motor stator coils to the inverter’s +5V
analogue input, as the right figure.
• Refer to parameters F20.06 and F20.07
about the thermistor. 10k
• Refer to parameters F16.00－F16.03
AI4+ Jumper setting
about the range of 1－7.
CN3 CN4

1
Thermistor V V
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F16.03
and F16.04 (analogue inputs AI3 and AI4) be I R
AI4-

3
enabled.
F16.05 Analogue input AI1 bias -100.0－100.0【0.0%】
F16.08 Analogue input AI2 bias
F16.11 Analogue input AI3 bias
F16.14 Analogue input AI4 bias
F16.06 Analogue input AI1 gain -10.00－10.00【1.00】
F16.09 Analogue input AI2 gain
F16.12 Analogue input AI3 gain
F16.15 Analogue input AI4 gain
F16.07 Analogue input AI1 filtering time 0.01－10.00【0.05s】
F16.10 Analogue input AI2 filtering time 6
F16.13 Analogue input AI3 filtering time
F16.16 Analogue input AI4 filtering time
When select AI1－AI4 inputs as open-loop frequency setting source, the relationship between the
analogue input and the setting frequency is shown as figure:

Analogue Analogue Analogue input gain Analogue value

actual value input filtering Analogue input bias after computing

The analogue voltage reasults from setting frequency signal disposed by analogue input filtering, bias
and gain. The relationship between the analogue voltage and the setting frequency is set by
parameters of Group F05.
• Analogue input gain and bias are involved in analogue calculation is as following formula: Y=kX+b
• Here: Y is the calculated analogue, X is the value before adjusting, k is the analogue input gain
(F16.06, F16.09, F16.12, F16.15), and b is the analogue input bias (F16.05, F16.08, F16.11,
F16.14).
• F16.07, F16.10, F16.13, F16.16 define the filtering time. It is used to filter the analogue signal.The
longer the filter time is, the higher the immunity level is, but the response time is prolonged. That
is, the shorter the filter time is, the quicker the response time is, but the lower the immunity level.
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F16.11－F16.16 (analogue inputs AI3 and AI4) be
enabled.
F16.17 Maximum input pulse frequency 0.0－50.0【10.0kHz】
When set the DI6 terminal as pulse input, F16.17 defines the maximum input pulse frequency.
F16.18 Input pulse filtering time 0－500【10ms】
It is used to filter the input pulse frequency and filter out the small fluctuations in the pulse frequency.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―103―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F16.19 AO1 terminal output function selection 0－19【1】
F16.20 AO2 terminal output function selection 0－19【0】
F16.21 High-speed pulse output function selection 0－19【0】
0: Reversed.
1,2: Output frequency, reference frquency (0－maximum output frequency)
3: Motor RPM (0－maximum output frequency corresponding to RPM).
4: Output current (0－twice motor’s rated current).
5: Output current (0－twice motor’s rated current).
6－9: Reversed.
10: Output torque (0－3 times motor’s rated torque).
11: Output voltage (0－1.2 times inverter’s rated voltage).
12: Bus voltage (0－2.2 times inverter’s rated voltage).
13: Output power (0－twice motor’s rated power).
14: AI1 input (0－10V).
15: AI2 input (-10－10V / 0－20mA).
16: AI3 input (-10－10V / 0－20mA).
17: AI4 input (-10－10V / 0－20mA).
18,19: Output frequency, reference frequency (- 1 times－1 times maximum output frequency).

―104― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F16.22 Analogue output AO1 bias -100.0－100.0【0.0%】
F16.23 Analogue output AO1 gain 0.0－200.0【100.0%】
• This parameter is used to realise the proportional relation adjustment of AO1 analogue output.
• The formula is: Y=kX+b
• Y is actual output value, X is output value with ratio and gain not being adjusted, k is analogue
output gain (F16.23), b is analogue output bias (F16.22).
The relationship between analogue output and bias is shown as following figure.
Value after regulating (V)
100%

F16.22=50%
F16.22=0
50%

0 10 Value before regulating (V)

The relationship between analogue output and gain is shown as following figure.
Value after regulating (V)
100%

F16.23=200%

F16.23=100%
6

0 5 10 Value before regulating (V)

F16.24 Analogue output AO2 bias -100.0－100.0【0.0%】
F16.25 Analogue output AO2 gain 0.0－200.0【100.0%】
Refer to parameters F16.22 and F16.23.
F16.26 DO2 maximum output pulse frequency 0.1－50.0【10.0kHz】
It defines the DO2 terminal allowable maximum output frequency.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―105―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.18 Group F17 SCI Communication Parameters
Refer to Appendix C (Page 181) for the communication function.
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F17.00 Data format 0－5【0】
0: 1-8-2 format, no parity, RTU.
1: 1-8-1 format, even parity, RTU.
2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity, RTU.
3: 1-7-2 format, no parity, ASCII.
4: 1-7-1 format, even parity, ASCII.
5: 1-7-1 format, odd parity, ASCII.
F17.01 Baud rate selection 0－8【3】
0: 1200bps. 5: 38400bps.
1: 2400bps. 6：57600bps.
2: 4800bps. 7：76800bps.
3: 9600bps. 8：115200bps.
4: 19200bps.
F17.02 Local address 0－247【2】
When F17.02 = 0, it means broadcast address.
F17.03 Host PC response time 0－1000【0ms】
F17.04 Time threshold for detecting communication status 0.0－1000.0【0.0 s】
When the time at no communication data exceeds the setting time of F17.04, it will be considered as
communication time out.
• When F17.04 = 0, it will not detect communication time out.
F17.05 Detecting time at communication error 0.0－1000.0s【0.0】
When the time at communication error exceeds the setting time of F17.05, it will be considered as
communication error detection.
• When F17.05 = 0, it will not detect the communication error.
F17.06 Action selection at communication time out 0－3【3】
F17.07 Action selection at communication fault 0－3【3】
F17.08 Action selection at communication peripheral device fault 0－3【1】
F17.06 defines the action selection at commmunication time out.
F17.07 defines the action selection at communication fault.
In the communication command setting mode, F17.08 will define the action selection when
communication peripheral device fault is alarmed.
0: Coast to stop.
1: Emergency stop.
2: Decelerate to stop.
3: Continue to run.
F17.09 Communication write function parameter of storage EEPROM 0,1【1】
method selection
0: Communication write function parameter without storage EEPROM.
1: Communication write function parameter with storage EEPROM.
Note: Only when using the communication write function parameter, and function code is 0x06
or 0x10, will F17.09 be valid. Refer to Protocol Function of Appendix C for details.

―106― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.19 Group F18 Display Control Parameters
Note: Refer to the《User Manual of HD31 Series Special Inverter for Water and Wastewater application》 for
the water and wastewater display parameters.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F18.00 Language selection 0,1【0】
It defines the displaying language on the LCD display panel.
• Only when using LCD display panel will F18.00 be enabled.
0: Chinese.
1: English.
F18.01 Displaying contrast of the LCD display panel 1－10【5】
To select LCD displaying contrast.
• Only when using LCD display panel will F18.01 be enabled.
F18.02 Set the display parameter 1 during operation 0－49【8】
F18.03 Set the display parameter 2 during operation 0－49【7】
F18.04 Set the display parameter 3 during operation 0－49【9】
F18.05 Set the display parameter 4 during operation 0－49【13】
F18.06 Set the display parameter 5 during operation 0－49【14】
F18.07 Set the display parameter 6 during operation 0－49【18】
F18.08 Set the display parameter 1 at stop 0－49【7】
F18.09 Set the display parameter 2 at stop 0－49【18】
F18.10 Set the display parameter 3 at stop 0－49【20】
F18.11 Set the display parameter 4 at stop 0－49【22】
F18.12 Set the display parameter 5 at stop 0－49【43】
F18.13 Set the display parameter 6 at stop 0－49【44】 6
The display panel displays parameters which difine the operation status (F18.02－F18.07) and stop
status (F18.08－F18.13).
• It can be cycling displayed by key on the display panel.
• Each display parameter of content can be set as the corresponding 49 statuses.
• For instance: when set F18.08 as 7, it displays stop parameters which is setting frequency at initial
power on.
0: Reserved.
1: Inverter’s rated current.
2: Inverter’s extension function.
• 0: No extension function.
• 1: Water and wastwater applications.
3: The inverter status.
• Refer to parameter d00.10.
4: Master setting frequency source.
5: Master setting frequency.
6: Auxiliary setting frequency.
7: Setting frequency.
8: Reference frequency (after acceleration/ deceleration).
9: Output frequency.
• At running state, Hz indicator is flashing.
10: Setting RPM.
11: Running RPM.
• At running state, RPM indicator is flashing.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―107―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

12: Three-phase power supply input phase sequence.
• 0: Positive sequence, L1(R) preceding L2(S) preceding L3(T).
• 1: Negative sequence, L1(R) preceding L3(T) preceding L2(S).
13: Output voltage.
14: Output current.
15: Reserved.
16: Output torque.
17: Output power.
18: DC bus voltage.
19: Potentiometer input voltage.
20: AI1 input voltage.
21: AI1 input voltage (after disposal).
22: AI2 input voltage.
23: AI2 input voltage (after disposal).
24: AI3 input voltage.
25: AI3 input voltage (after disposal).
26: AI4 input voltage.
27: AI4 input voltage (after disposal).
28: DI6 terminal pulse input frequency.
29: AO1 output.
30: AO2 output.
31: High-speed output pulse frequency.
32: Heatsink temperature.
33: Set the line speed.
34: Reference line speed.
35－36: Reserved.
37: Process PID reference.
38: Process PID feedback.
39: Process PID error.
40: Process PID integral value.
41: Process PID output.
42: External couting value.
43: Input terminal status. Bit0－Bit8 are corresponding to DI1－DI9.
44: Output terminal status. Bit0－Bit11 are corresponding to DO1, DO2, RLY1－RLY10.
45: MODBUS communication status.
46: Actual length.
47: Total length.
48: Total time at power on (hour).
49: Total time at running (hour).
F18.14 Reserved
F18.15 Maximum line speed 0－65535【1000】
F18.16 Line speed display accuracy 1－3【0】
0: Integer.
1: One decimal.
2: Two decimal.
3: Three decimal.

―108― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction
6.2.20 Group F19 Function-boost Parameters
Frequency auxiliary setting sources (F19.00－F19.06)
The multi-step frequency of HD30 series inverters is the result of both master setting frequency and
auxiliary setting frequency.
F19.00 defines the auxiliary frequency setting sources. When the auxiliary frequency setting
source is the same as the master frequency setting source (except analogue setting), the auxiliary
frequency setting source will be disabled.
Master frequency setting source:
Digital setting F00.10 = 0,1,2
Analogue setting F00.10 = 3
Pulse setting F00.10 = 4
Frequency proportional
+ adjustment F19.05, F19.06 Setting frequency
Auxiliary frequency setting source:
Digital setting F19.00 = 1,2,3
Analogue setting F19.00 = 4
Pulse setting F19.00 = 5
Process PID output F19.00=6

Preprocessing
Display panel
Initial value Save function at power off
Digital
Terminal UP/DN F19.03 and stop control F19.04
Auxiliary
SCI communication Digital frequency
setting Auxiliary
AI Analogue source setting
Gain process External reference
selection frequency 6
Pulse F19.02 curve selection F05.00
Pulse F19.00
Process PID

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.00 Auxiliary frequency setting source selection 0－6【0】
It defines the setting source of the auxiliary frequency.
• When set F19.00 as 1 and 2, the initial value is set by F19.03. Setting F19.04 can save the modified
frequency to F19.03 at power loss.
• When set F19.00 as 4 and 5, the initial value is set by the actual analogue input. Refer to F05.00
about the frequency relation characteristic curve selections.
• When set F19.00 as 6, set the auxiliary setting frequency according to the relationship of PID setting
and feedback.
• Please refer to the above figure.
0: No auxiliary source.
1: Digital setting 1, adjusted by and keys on the display panel. The initial value is set by F19.03.
2: Digital setting 2, adjusted by terminal UP/DN. The initial value is set by F19.03.
3: Digital setting 3, set by SCI communication. The initial value is 0.
4: AI analogue setting.
5: Terminal pulse setting.
6: Process PID output.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―109―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.01 Master/Auxiliary setting calculation 0－5【0】
It defines the calculating relationship between the final setting frequency and the master/auxiliary
freqeuency.
0: Master setting + auxiliary setting.
1: Master setting − auxiliary setting.
2: MAX (master setting, auxiliary setting).
3: MIN (master setting, auxiliary setting).
4: Master setting + auxiliary setting × master setting ⁄maximum value of master setting.
5: Master setting – auxiliary setting × master setting ⁄maximum value of master setting .
F19.02 Analogue auxiliary setting coefficient 0.00－9.99【1.00】
First, calculate the gain by using F19.02, then calculate auxiliary frequency according to the frequency
characteristic curve of Group F05. When F19.00 = 4,5, F19.02 is enabled.
F19.03 Initial value of digital auxiliary frequency 0.00－F00.06【0.00】
Only when F19.00 = 1 or 2 will F19.03 be enabled and provide the initial value for the two methods.
F19.04 Control selection of digital auxiliary frequency 00－11【00】
Only when F19.00 = 1 or 2 will F19.04 be enabled.
Units: Save selection at power outage
• 0: Not save auxiliary frequency at power outage.
• 1: The auxiliary frequency will be saved to F19.03 at power outage.
Tens: Frequency disposal when the inverter stops
• 0: Maintain the auxiliary frequency when the inverter stops.
• 1: The auxiliary frequency clears to zero when the inverter stops.
F19.05 Adjustment selection of setting frequency 0－2【1】
F19.06 Adjustment coefficient of setting frequency 0.0－200.0【100.0%】
F19.05 and F19.06 is to set the adjustment mode of setting frequency (the compounded frequency is
computed by master setting frequency plus auxiliary setting frequency).
0: No adjustment.
• Setting frequency = master setting frequency + auxiliary setting frequency.
1: To adjust as per the max. output frequency of F00.06.
• Setting frequency = (master setting frequency + auxiliary setting frequency) + F00.06 × (F19.06 -
100％).
2: To adjust as per the current frequency.
• Setting frequency = (master setting frequency + auxiliary setting frequency) × F19.06.
F19.07 Control selection of cooling fan 0－2【0】
F19.08 Cooling fan controls delaying time 0.0－600.0【30.0s】
0: Auto stop mode.
• The fan runs all the time when the inverter is in running status. After the inverter stops for the time
set by F19.08, the fan stops if the inverter is not overheated. The fan will continue running if the
overheat protection is activated.
1: Immediate stop mode. The fan runs all the time when the inverter is in running status and stops when
the inverter stops.
2: The fan runs continuously when power on. The fan runs continuously after the inverter is switched on.
F19.09 Droop control 0.00－10.00【0.00Hz】
This function is used in the application that several inverters drive one motor. The function can make the
inverters share the load equally.
When the load of one inverter is heavier, this inverter will reduce its output frequency to shed part of the
load according to the setting of F19.09.

―110― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Zero-frequency operation (F19.10－F19.11)

Refer to below figure for the details.
Fcmd1 = Final setting frequency 1 Flow = Lower limit frequency (parameter
Fcmd2 = Final setting frequency 2 F00.09)
Fstart = Start DWELL frequency (parameter H = Target frequency
F02.02) Fmin = Zero-frequency threshold (parameter
fstart = Actual start DWELL frequency F19.10)

Judgement program at instantaneous start

NO
Fcmd>Fmin Based on parameter F19.11

YES
NO YES
Fstart>Fmin fstart=Fmin Flow=0 H=Fcmd
Hz

YES Fcmd
Fmin
fstart=Fstart Fstart
Time

NO Operating judgement program

NO
after starting
Flow=0 Fcmd>Flow
NO 6
YES YES Based on
Fcmd<Fmin
NO F19.11
Based on
YES Fcmd>Fmin
F19.11
H=Fcmd NO
YES H=Flow
Hz Hz H=Fcmd
Hz
Fcmd F00.06 H=Fcmd1 F00.06 H=Flow
Fcmd1 Fcmd>Flow and
Fstart Flow Flow>Fcmd1
Fmin Fcmd1>Fmin
Fmin Fcmd1 >Fmin
Fcmd2
Time Fmin
Flow
Based on F19.11 Fcmd2 Based on
Time Fcmd2>Flow and F19.11
Time
Fcmd2<Fmin Fmin>Fcmd2

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.10 Zero-frequency threshold 0.00－upper limit【1.00Hz】
F19.11 Action selection at setting frequency is lower than 0－3【0】
zero-frequency threshold
0: Run according to frequency command.
1: Holding stop, no output.
2: Run according to zero-frequency threshold.
3: Run according to zero-frequency.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―111―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Trip-free operation during momentary power loss (F19.12－F19.15)

The inverter can automatically perform low-voltage compensation when the voltage decreases or
instantaneous under-voltage occurs. The inverter can continue to operate without tripping by
reducing its output frequency and feedback energy via motor.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.12 Trip-free selection at momentary power loss 0,1【0】

Voltage
F19.14
0: This function is disabled.
1: This function is enabled. And low-voltage Bus voltage
compensation is activated. F19.15

• If the bus voltage is lower than F19.15, the Output freq. Time
inverter will decrease the operating frequency
according to F19.13. Setting freq.
• If the bus voltage is higher than F19.15 and Acceleration
maintains the voltage rise diagnosis time
F19.13 time
(F19.14), the inverter will reset the setting
frequency to run. Otherwise, the inverter will Time
continue to decrease the running frequency.

F19.13 Deceleration time at voltage compensation 0.1－6000.0【5.0s】

If F19.13 is set too big, the feedback energy of motor will be too small to achieve voltage compensation
effect. If F19.13 is set too small, the feedback energy of motor will be too large and overvoltage
protection might be activated.
F19.14 Voltage rise diagnosis time of trip-free operation at 0.00－10.00【0.10s】
momentary power loss
F19.15 Reference voltage of trip-free operation at momentary power 0－1200V
loss 【220V inverter: 248V】
【380V inverter: 430V】
【660V inverter: 747V】

Restart after power failure (F19.16－F19.17)

This function decides in different control modes whether the inverter starts automatically or not and
the delay time for restart when the inverter is switched off and then switched on.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.16 Restart after power failure 0,1【0】
0: This function is disabled.
1: This function is enabled. In the terminal two-wire control mode and suddenly power failure during
running process, when the inverter is powered on again and the terminal is still enabled, it will wait
certain time defined by F19.17 and then start operation automatically.
F19.17 Delay time for restart after power failure 0.00－10.00【2.00s】

―112― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Protection of stall overvoltage (F19.18－F19.19)

During deceleration, the motor’s decelerate rate may be lower than that of the inverter’s output
frequency due to the load inertia. At this time, the motor will feed the energy back to the inverter,
resulting in voltage rise on the inverter's DC bus. If no measures taken, the inverter will trip due to
overvoltage.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.18 Protection of stall overvoltage 0,1【0】
0: Disabled. The dynamic braking unit and braking resistor are recommended to be installed if F19.18 is
set to 0.
1: Enabled. During the deceleration, the inverter detects the bus voltage and compares it with the stall
overvoltage point defined by F19.18.
• If the detecting bus voltage exceeds F19.19 (stall overvoltage point), the inverter will stop reducing
its output frequency. When detect again, if the bus voltage becomes lower than F19.19, the
deceleration continues.
Note: If stall overvoltage lasts more than 1 minute, the inverter will alarm fault (E0007). And at this
time, the inverter stops output.
F19.19 Stall overvoltage point 0－1200V
【220V inverter: 390V】
【380V inverter: 740V】
【660V inverter: 1150V】
If the stall overvoltage point is set a little lower, deceleration time should be comparatively longer.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―113―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Auto current limiting function (F19.20－F19.22)

Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load current in real time smaller than the auto
current limiting threshold (F19.21). Therefore the inverter will not trip due to surge current. This
function is especially suitable for applications with big load inertia or big change of load.
In auto current limiting process, the inverter’s output frequency may change; therefore, it is
recommended not to enable this function when stable output frequency is required.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.20 Auto current limiting selection 0－2【1】
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled in acceleration/deceleration operating process, but disabled in constant speed operating
process.
2: Enabled both in acceleration/deceleration operating process and in constant speed operating process.
• When the auto current limiting function is enabled, the output overload capacity will impaired if auto
current limiting threshold is set too low.
F19.21 Auto current limiting threshold 20.0－200.0
【G：150%】 【P：110%】
F19.21 defines the threshold of auto current limiting. It is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.
F19.22 Deceleration time at auto current limiting 0.0－6000.0
【15kW and below: 10.00s】
【18.5－55kW inverter: 30.00s】
【75kW and above: 60.00s】
F19.22 defines the speed rate for the output frequency adjustment at auto current limiting action.
• If the setting is too small, it will not be easy to over the auto current limiting status and finally result in
overload fault.
• If the setting is too big, the frequency will change too sharply and therefore, the inverter may be in
generating status for a long time, which may result in overvoltage protection.
• If F19.22 is set to 0, it will not decelerate at current limiting.
F19.23 Enabled mode of terminal run command 0,1【0】
0: Rise edge enabled mode.
• For many applications, the inverter is not allowed to auto-run to avoid device damage and ensure
safety due to no person interference at power on. In these applications, when the inverter’s power
is initialized and ready to run, it can not start to run until the terminal run command is given.
1: Level enabled mode.
• For certain applications, when ensured personal safety and device safety it need the inverter
immediately run at power on in order to provide automation and efficiency. In these application, the
inverter will immediately run as soon as the terminal run command is given whether before or after
power on.

―114― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Braking unit (F19.24－F19.25)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.24 Action voltage of braking unit 220V inverter 330－400【380V】
380V inverter 630－750【720V】
660V inverter 850－1200【1130V】
Note: Only in inverter running status the braking is enabled.
F19.25 Reserved

Fixed length arrive and stop function (F19.26－F19.34)

This group is used to realize fixed length stop
function. As the right figure:
The inverter inputs the count pulse from the
terminal (multi-function terminal is set as No. 52 Measuring speed shaft
function) and gets the count length according to
the measuring number of pulses per revolution
(F19.31) and shaft diameter (F19.30). Then modify
the count length and obtain the actual length Inverter Motor
(F19.27) via length ratio (F19.28) and length
checking coefficient (F19.29) too.
The formula is as follows:
F19.27 = Counted length × F19.28 ÷ F19.29
Counted length = Counted pulse number ÷ F19.31 × F19.30 × π
If F19.27 ≥ F19.26, the inverter will automatically send the stop command. Before running again, it
6
need clear F19.27 or changed to F19.27 < F19.26. Otherwise the inverter can’t be started.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F19.26 Preset length 0－65535【0m】
F19.27 Actual length 0－65535【0m】
F19.28 Length ratio 0.001－30.000【1.000】
F19.29 Length checking coefficient 0.001－1.000【1.000】
F19.30 Measuring shaft diameter 1.00－100.00【10.00cm】
F19.31 Number of pulses per revolution 1－9999【1】
F19.32 Length arrive and output function selection 0,1【0】
0: Output level signal.
1: Output 500ms pulse.
F19.33 Record of length disposal after length arrive 0,1【0】
0: Auto-clear.
1: No change.
F19.34 Record of length disposal at stop 0,1【0】
0: Auto-clear.
1: No change.
F19.35 Reserved
F19.36 Reserved
F19.37 Reserved
F19.38 Reserved

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―115―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.21 Group F20 Protection of Fault Parameters
Overload fault (F20.00－F20.02)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F20.00 Overload pre-alarm detection 00000－11111【00000】
Units: Overload pre-alarm detection
• 0: It is active all the time in running status.
• 1: It is active only at constant speed.
Tens: Action selection for overload pre-alarm
• 0: The inverter doesn’t alarm and continues operation when detecting an active overload signal.
• 1: The inverter alarms and stops operation when detecting an active overload signal.
Hundreds: Overload threshold selection
• 0: Ratio of load current to the motor’s rated current (alarm: motor overload “E0019”).
• 1: Ratio of load current to the inverter’s rated current (alarm: inverter overload “E0017”).
Thousands: Motor type selection
• 0: Standard motor. As the cooling effect of the standard motor deteriorates at low speed, the
inverter will automatically make regulation to the motor overload protection time.
• 1: Variable frequency. The cooling effect of the variable frequency motor is not affected by the
motor’s speed due to its forced cooling potential, the inverter will not automatically make
regulation to the motor overload protection time, as efficient motor cooling by an external motor
fan is assumed.
Ten thousands: Overload protection
• 0: Overload protection is enabled.
• 1: Overload protection is disabled.
F20.01 Overload pre-alarm detection threshold 20.0－200.0【150.0%】
F20.01 defines the current threshold for overload pre-alarm protection. The setting range is a
percentage value of the motor’s or the inverter’s rated current
F20.02 Overload pre-alarm detection time 0.0－60.0【5.0s】
F20.02 defines the time during which the inverter output current exceeds overload pre-alarm detection
threshold (F20.01). If the status remains after overload pre-alarm detection time (F20.02), the inverter
will output pre-alarm signal.

Inverter output load-loss detection fault (F20.03－F20.05)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F20.03 Inverter output load-loss detection 0－4【0】
0: Disabled. It does not detect inverter output load-loss.
1: It is detecting all the time in running process, and then continues operation after detecting (alarm).
2: It detectes only at the same speed, and then continues operation after detecting (alarm).
3: It is detecting all the time in running process, and then cut off the output after detecting (fault).
4: It is detectes only at the same speed, and then cut off the output after detecting (fault).
F20.04 Inverter output load-loss detection threshold 0－100【30%】
F20.04 defines the current threshold of load-loss. It is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.
F20.05 Inverter output load-loss detection time 0.00－20.00【1.00s】
If the inverter’s output current is smaller than the load-loss detection threshold (F20.04) beyond the
time defined by load-loss detection time (F20.05), the inverter will alarm inverter load-loss fault
(E0018).
• When F20.04 or F20.05 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect load loss fault.

―116― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Motor overheating fault (F20.06－F20.07)

It can connect the electronic thermistor embedded motor stator coils to the inverter’s analogue
input in order to protect motor overheating. The connection is shown as the figure of parameter
F16.04.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F20.06 Motor overheating signal input type 0－2【0】
0: Does not detect the motor overheating.
1: Positive charateristic (PTC).
2: Negative charateristic (NTC).
Note: Only when using HD30-EIO will F20.06 be enabled. It need correctly set the jumpers of
CN3 and CN4 to detect the motor overheating.
F20.07 Thermistor value at motor overheating 0－10.0【5.0kΩ】

Input and output phase loss fault (F20.08－F20.11)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F20.08 Input phase loss detection reference 0－50【30%】
F20.09 Input phase loss detection time 1.00－5.00【1.00s】
F20.08 value is a percentage of the inverter’s rated voltage.
When the inverter detects certain input voltage not hit the preset detection reference (F20.08) and
exceed the preset detection time (F20.09), the inverter will perform input phase loss alarm (E0015).
• When F20.08 or F20.09 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect input phase loss fault.
F20.10 Output phase loss detection reference 0－50【20%】
F20.11 Output phase loss detection time 0.00－20.00【3.00s】 6
F20.10 value is a percentage of the inverter’s rated current.
When the inverter detects certain output current not hit the preset detection reference (F20.10) and
exceed the preset detection time (F20.11), the inverter will perform output phase loss alarm (E0016).
• When F20.10 or F20.11 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect output phase loss fault.

PID reference and feedback loss fault (F20.12－F20.17)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F20.12 PID reference lose detected value 0－100【0%】
F20.13 PID reference loss detection time 0.0－10.0【0.20s】
F20.12 value is a percentage of the maximum reference source.
If the PID reference value is lower than the detected value (F20.12) in the detection time（F20.13）, the
inverter will alarm E0025 fault (PID reference loss).
• When F20.12 or F20.13 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect PID reference loss fault.
F20.14 PID feedback loss detected value 0－100【0%】
F20.15 PID feedback loss detection time 0.0－10.0【0.20s】
F20.14 value is a percentage of the maximum feedback source.
If the PID feedback value is lower than the detected value (F20.14) in the detection time (F20.15), the
inverter will implement PID feedback loss alarm (E0026).
• When F20.14 or F20.15 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect PID feedback loss fault.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―117―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Fault at PID feedback value out of the limit (F20.16－F20.17)

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F20.16 Detection value at PID feedback out of the limit 0－100【100%】
F20.17 Detection time at PID feedback out of the limit 0.00－10.00【0.20s】
F20.16 value is a percentage of the maximum feedback source.
If the PID feedback value exceed the detection value (F20.16) in the detection time (F20.17), the
inverter will alarm PID feedback out of limiting (E0027).
• When F20.16 or F20.17 is set to 0, the inverter will not detect PID feedback out of limiting fault.

Faulted auto reset function and faulted relay action (F20.18－F20.20)

Auto reset function enables the inverter to reset the fault as per the preset times (F20.18) and
interval (F20.19).
During the reset interval, the inverter stops output and it will automatically restarts with flying start
mode.
The following faults do not have the auto reset function:
E0008: Power modular fault E0021: Control board EEPROM read/write fault
E0010: Braking unit fault E0023: Parameter setting fault
E0013: Contactor isn’t closed at power on E0024: Peripheral device fault
E0014: Current detection circuit fault

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F20.18 Auto reset times 0－100【0】
F20.19 Auto reset interval 2.0－20.0【5.0s/times】
When F20.19 = 0, it means “auto reset” is disabled and the protective device will be activated in case
of fault.
• If no other fault is detected within 5 minutes, the auto reset times will be automatically cleared.
• On condition of external fault reset, auto reset time will be cleared.
F20.20 Faulted relay action selection 00－11【00】
Units: In auto reset process
• 0: Faulted relay doesn’t act.
• 1: Faulted relay acts.

Tens: In the undervoltage process

• 0: Faulted relay doesn’t act.
• 1: Faulted relay acts.
Note: It need preset the relay function as No. 31 function.

―118― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

Fault history (F20.21－F20.37)

F20.22－F20.29 record the inverter status parameters at the last fault.
F20.30－F20.37 record the type and interval per time of four faults before the latest. The
interval’s unit is 0.1 hour.

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

F20.21 Type of fifth latest (the last) fault 【Actual value】
F20.22 Setting frequency at the last fault
F20.23 Running frequency at the last fault
F20.24 Bus voltage at the last fault
F20.25 Output voltage at the last fault
F20.26 Output current at the last fault
F20.27 Input terminal status at the last fault
F20.28 Output terminal status at the last fault
F20.29 Interval of fifth latest fault
F20.30 Type of fourth latest fault
F20.31 Interval of fourth latest fault
F20.32 Type of third latest fault
F20.33 Interval of third latest fault
F20.34 Type of second latest fault
F20.35 Interval of second latest fault
F20.36 Type of first latest fault
F20.37 Interval of first latest fault
6
6.2.22 Group F21 Reserved

6.2.23 Group F22 Reserved

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―119―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
6.2.24 Group F23 PWM Control Parameters
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
F23.00 Set the carrier frequency 1－16kHz【dependent on
inverter model】
F23.00 defines the carrier frequency of PWM output wave.
Inverter power Setting range Factory setting
0.2－22kW 1k－16kHz 8kHz
30kW－45kW 1k－12kHz 6kHz
45kW 1k－6kHz 4kHz
55kW and above 1k－4kHz 2kHz

• The carrier frequency will affect the operating noise of the motor. The higher the carrier frequency,
the lower the noise made by the motor. Please properly set the carrier frequency.
• When the value is higher than the factory setting, the inverter should be derated by 5% when per
1kHz is increased compared to the factory setting.
F23.01 Reserved
F23.02 PWM overshoot enable 0,1【1】
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
F23.03 PWM modulation mode 0－2【0】
0: Two-phase modulation or three-phase modulation.
1: Three-phase modulation.
2: Two-phase modulation.

―120― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 6 Function Introduction

6.3 Group U User Menu Mode Display Parameters

When the user select fewer function parameters which is scattered in the function menu, the user
can map the function menu to the user menu. Then the user can only operate in the user menu to
read and write the required function parameters. It not only can avoid the frequently switch
among the parameter groups but also can arrange the menu order according to our own habits.
That will be much easier to memory and operate. Refer to Appendix B about the record.
The concrete use is illustrated as the following example:
If you want to map F00.13 (starting frequency digital setting) to the user menu map 1 (U00.00),
you only need to set U00.00 as 00.13 (corresponding to F00.13) and then you can directly control
F00.13 via read-write U00.01 (setting value of map 1), which is the same effect as the direct
operation of F00.13.
No. Name Description Range【factory setting】
U00.00 User menu map of setting 1 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.01】
U00.02 User menu map of setting 2 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.06】
U00.04 User menu map of setting 3 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.08】
U00.06 User menu map of setting 4 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.13】
U00.08 User menu map of setting 5 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.10】
U00.10 User menu map of setting 6 00.00－23.02，99.99【00.11】
U00.12 User menu map of setting 7 00.00－23.02，99.99【02.13】
U00.14 User menu map of setting 8 00.00－23.02，99.99【03.01】
U00.16 User menu map of setting 9 00.00－23.02，99.99【03.02】
U00.18 User menu map of setting 10 00.00－23.02，99.99【08.00】 6
U00.20 User menu map of setting 11 00.00－23.02，99.99【08.01】
U00.22 User menu map of setting 12 00.00－23.02，99.99【08.02】
U00.24 User menu map of setting 13 00.00－23.02，99.99【08.03】
U00.26 User menu map of setting 14 00.00－23.02，99.99【08.04】
U00.28 User menu map of setting 15 －
U00.30 User menu map of setting 16 －
If set as 99.99, there is no parameter map function.
U00.01 The setting value of map 1 The same as the selected
U00.03 The setting value of map 2 parameter【0】
U00.05 The setting value of map 3
U00.07 The setting value of map 4
U00.09 The setting value of map 5
U00.11 The setting value of map 6
U00.13 The setting value of map 7
U00.15 The setting value of map 8
U00.17 The setting value of map 9
U00.19 The setting value of map 10
U00.21 The setting value of map 11
U00.23 The setting value of map 12
U00.25 The setting value of map 13
U00.27 The setting value of map 14
U00.29 The setting value of map 15

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―121―

Chapter 6 Function Introduction Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

No. Name Description Range【factory setting】

U00.31 The setting value of map 16

6.4 Group y Manufacturer Function Parameters

The Group y is the manufacturer parameters group for debugging at the factory before delivery.

―122― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
HD30 series inverter has inbuilt protective and warning self-diagnostic functions. If a fault occurs,
the fault code will be displayed on the display panel. At the same time, fault relay acts,
accordingly the inverter stops output and the motor coasts to stop.
When fault or alarm occurs, please record the fault details and take proper actions according to
the below Table 7-1. If you need some technical help, please contact to the suppliers or directly
call Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.
After the fault is eliminated, please reset the inverter by any of the following methods:
1. Display panel.
2. External reset terminal (multi-function terminal set as No. 46 function).
3. Communication.
4. Switching on the inverter after switching off.
Table 7-1 Fault alarm description and counter-measures
Fault code Fault name Possible reasons of fault Counter-measures
• It is normal status of powering on
• At the begining of powering on
and powering off
and at the end of powering off
DC bus • Please check input power
-Lu- • Input voltage is too low
undervoltage voltage
• Improper wiring leads to
• Please check wiring and wire the
undervoltage of hardware
inverter properly
Inverter output
• Connect the inverter and motor
overcurrent (in
E0001 • Improper connection between properly
acceleration
inverter and motor • Please set correct motor
process)
Inverter output
• Improper motor parameters parameters (F08.00－F08.04、 7
• The rating of the used inverter F13.01－F13.05)
overcurrent (in
E0002 is too small • Select inverter with higher rating
deceleration
• Acceleration/deceleration time • Please set proper acceleration
process)
is too short time and deceleration time
Inverter output (F03.01－F03.08)
• Instant stop occurs, the
overcurrent (in
E0003 running motor is restarted • Please set start mode to be
constant speed
speed tracking (F02.00=2)
process)
DC bus over
• Please check power input
voltage
E0004 • Please set a proper value for
(in acceleration • Input voltage is too high
process) deceleration time (F03.02、
• Deceleartion time is too short
F03.04、F03.06、F03.08)
DC bus over • Improper wiring leads to
• Please check wiring and wire the
voltage overvoltage of hardware
E0005 inverter properly
(in deceleration • Instant stop occurs, the
• Please set start mode to be
process) running motor is restarted
speed tracking (F02.00=2)
DC bus over • Improper selection of the
• Select according to the
voltage braking devices
E0006 recommended braking devices of
(in constant
user manual
speed process)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―123―

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Fault code Fault name Possible reasons of fault Counter-measures

• Please check power input or the
• Bus voltage is too high
function of brake
E0007 Stall overvoltage • The setting of stall overvoltage
• Set the value of stall
is too low.
overvoltage properly
• Please check the connection and
connect the wire properly
• Short circuit between phases
• Please check the connection and
output
Fault of power connect the wire properly
E0008 • Short circuit to the ground
module • Please check the connection and
• Output current is too high
mechanism
• Power module is damaged
• Please contact the supplier for
repairing
• Ambient temperature is too
• Please use inverter with higher
high
power capacity
• Inverter external ventilation is
Heatsink • Improve the ventilation around
E0009 not good
overheat the inverter
• Fan fault
• Replace the cooling fan
• Fault occurs to temperature
• Please seek technical support
detection circuit
Fault of braking
E0010 • Circuit fault of braking unit • Please seek technical support
unit
• Please detect at power on after
E0011 CPU fault • CPU abnormal completely power outage
• Please seek technical support
• Please check the motor’s
connection
Parameters • Parameter auto-tuning is time • Input the correct motor
E0012
auto-tuning fault out parameters (F08.00－F08.04、
F13.01－F13.05)
• Please seek technical support
Contactor is not • Contactor fault • Replace the contactor
E0013
actuated • Fault of control circuit • Please seek technical support
Fault of current • Current detection circuit is • Please contact the supplier for
E0014
detection circuit damaged repairing
• For three-phase input inverter, • Please check the three-phase
Fault of input
E0015 input phase loss fault occurs to power input
phase
power input • Please seek technical support
• Output phase disconnection or
• Please check the connection
Fault of output loss
E0016 between inverter and motor
phase • Heavy imbalance of inverter’s
• Please check the quality of motor
three-phase load

―124― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Fault code Fault name Possible reasons of fault Counter-measures

• Adjust acceleration time (F03.01、
F03.03、F03.05、F03.07)
• Acceleration time is too short
• Adjust V/f curve (F09.00—
• Improper setting of V/f curve or
F09.06) or torque boost (F09.07,
torque boost leads to over
F09.08)
current
E0017 Inverter overload • Please set start mode to be
• Instant power-off occurs, the
speed tracking (F02.00=2)
running motor is restarted
• Please check mains supply
• Mains supply voltage is too low
voltage
• Motor load is too high
• Please use inverter with proper
power rating
• Please check load and
• Load disappeared or comes
Inverter output is mechanical transmission devices
E0018 down suddenly
unloaded • Please set the parmeters
• Parameters are not set properly
properly (F20.03—F20.05)
• Adjust the setting of V/f curve
• Improper setting of V/f curve
(F09.00—F09.06)
• Mains supply voltage is too low
• Check the power input
• Normal motor runs for a long
• Please use special motor if the
time with heavy load at low
motor needs to operate for a long
E0019 Motor overload speed
time with heavy load
• Motor’s overload protection
• Please properly set the overload
factor is not set properly
protection factor of the motor
• Motor runs with blocked torque
• Please check the load and
or load is too heavy
mechanical transmission devices
• Reduce the load; Repaire or
replace the motor; Increase the
• Motor overheat
acceleration/deceleration time
E0020 Motor overheat • The setting of motor
(F03.01—F03.08) 7
paramteters is incorrect
• Set the motor parameter (F08.00
－F08.04、F13.01－F13.05)
Access fault of
• Memory circuit fault of control • Please contact the supplier for
E0021 Control board
board EEPROM repairing
EEPROM
Access fault of • Replace the display panel
• Memory circuit fault of display
E0022 display panel • Please contact the supplier for
panel EEPROM
EEPROM repairing
• The power rating between • Select an inverter with suitable
motor and inverter is too power rating
Fault setting of
E0023 different • Please set correct value of motor
parameters
• Improper setting of motor parameters (F08.00－F08.04、
parameters F13.01－F13.05)
Fault of external • Fault terminal of external
E0024 • Please check external equipment
equipment equipment operates

Mark: E0022 doesn’t affect the inverter normal operation.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―125―

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Fault code Fault name Possible reasons of fault Counter-measures

• Analogue reference signal is
PID reference • Please check the connection
E0025 smaller than F20.12
loss • Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Analogue setting signal is
• Please check the connection
E0026 PID feedback loss smaller than F20.14
• Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Analogue setting signal is
PID feedback out • Please check the connection
E0027 bigger than F20.16
of limiting • Please seek technical support
• Analogue input circuit fault
• Connection fault of
SCI
Communication cable
E0028 communication • Please check the connection
• Disconnected or not well
time-out
connected
• Please check the connection
• Connection fault of
• Please check the connection
Communication cable
SCI • Please correctly set the
• Disconnected or not well
E0029 communication communication format (F17.00)
connected
error and the baud rate (F17.01)
• Communication setting error
• Send the data according to
• Communication data error
MODBUS protocol

―126― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 8 Maintenance

Chapter 8 Maintenance
Many factors such as ambient temperature, humidity, dust, oscillation, internal component aging,
wear and tear will give rise to the occurrence of potential faults. Therefore, it is necessary to
conduct daily maintenance to the inverter.
• If the inverter has been transported for a long distance, please check whether the components
of the inverter are complete and the screws are well tightened.
• Please periodically clean the dust inside the inverter and check whether the screws are loose.

Danger
• Only a trained and qualified professional person can maintain the inverter.
• Maintenance personnel should take off all metal jewellery before carrying out maintenance or
internal measurements in the inverter. Suitable clothes and tools must be used.
• High voltage exists when the inverter is powered up or running.
• Checking and maintaining can only be done after the inverter’s AC power is cut off and wait for at
least 10 minutes. The cover maintenance can only be done after ensured that the charge indicator
inside the inverter and the indicators on the display panel are off and the voltage between main
circuit power terminals (+) and (-) is below 36V.

Warning
• For the inverter stored for more than 2 years, please use voltage regulator to increase the input
voltage gradually.
• Do not leave metal parts like screws or pads inside the inverter.
• Do not make modification on the inside of inverter without instruction from the supplier.
• There are IC components inside the inverter, which are sensitive to static electricity. Directly touch
the components on the PCB board is forbidden.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―127―

Chapter 8 Maintenance Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

8.1 Daily Maintenance

The inverter must be operated in the specified environment (refer to section 3.2, page 11).
Besides, some unexpected accidents may occur during operation.
Therefore you should maintain the inverter conditions according to the Table 8-1, record the
operation data, and investigate problems immediately.
Table 8-1 Daily checking items
Items Content Criteria
Temperature and humidity -10－+40℃, derating at 40－50℃
Operating
Dust and water dripping No water dripping
environment
Gas No strange smell
Stable oscillation and proper
Oscillation and heating
Inverter temperature
Noise No abnormal sound
Heating No overheating
Motor
Noise Low and regular noise
Operating status Output current Within rated range
parameters Output voltage Within rated range

8.2 Periodical Maintenance

Customer should check the inverter in short time or every 3 to 6 months according to the actual
environment so as to avoid hidden problems and make sure the inverter runs well for a long time.
General Inspection:
• Check whether the screws of control terminals are loose. If so, tighten them with a screw
driver;
• Check whether the main circuit terminals are properly connected; whether the mains cables
are over heated;
• Check whether the power cables and control cables are damaged, check especially for any
wear on the cable tube;
• Check whether the insulating tapes around the cable lugs are stripped, and for signs of
overheating near terminations;
• Clean the dust on PCBs and air ducts with a vacuum cleaner;
Note:
1. Dielectric strength test of the inverter has already been conducted in the factory. Do not do the
test again. Otherwise, the inverter might be damaged.
2. If insulation test to the motor is necessary, it should be done after the motor’s input terminals U,
V, W have been detached from the inverter. Otherwise, the inverter will be damaged.
3. For inverters that have been stored for a long time, they must be powered up every 2 years.
When supplying AC power to the inverter, use a voltage regulator to gradually raise the input
voltage to rated input voltage at least 5 hours.

―128― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.3 Replacing Damaged Parts

The components that are easily damaged are: cooling fan and electrolytic capacitors of filters.
Their lifetime depends largely on their application environment and preservation. The users can
decide the time when the components should be replaced according to their service time.
Cooling fan
Life: 60,000 hours.
Possible cause of damages: Wear of the bearing, aging of the fan vanes.
Criteria: After the inverter is switched off, check if the abnormal conditions such as crack existing
on fan vanes and other parts. When the inverter is switched on, check if inverter running is
normal, and check if there is any abnormal oscillation.
Electrolytic capacitors
Life: 50,000 hours
Possible cause of damages: High ambient temperature, aging of electrolyte and large pulse
current induced by rapid changing loads.
Criteria: Check if frequent overcurrent or overvoltage failures occur during inverter start-up with
load. Check if there is any leakage of liquids. Check if the safety valve protrudes. Measure the
static capacitance and insulation resistance.

8.4 Unwanted Inverter Recycling

When disposing the inverter, please pay attention to the following factors:
The capacitors may explode if they are burnt.
Poisonous gas may be generated when the plastic parts like front covers are burnt.
Disposing method: Please dispose unwanted inverters as industrial waste.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―129―

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 9 Options

Chapter 9 Options
9.1 Extension I/O Card (HD30-EIO)
HD30 series inverters using with extension I/O card (HD30-EIO) can achieve the extension of
analogue input, digital input and relay contact output, shown as Figure 9-1.

To connect the control board HD30-EIO

Jumper Jumper Jumper
CN3 CN2 CN4
I/O card terminal

Figure 9-1 Extension I/O card

9.1.1 Terminal Description of Extension I/O Card

AI3 AI4+ DI7 DI8 DI9 R2A R3A R3B R4A
GND AI4- P24 SEL COM R2B R2C R3C R4B R4C
Figure 9-2 Extension I/O card terminal layout
Table 9-1 Extension I/O card terminal function description
Item Terminal Name Function description
Input voltage/current are selectable
AI3 Analogue input Input voltage range: -10V－10V (input impedance 32kΩ);
Analogue Input current range: 0－20mA (input impedance 500Ω)
input AI4+ Input voltage/current are selectable
Analogue
Input voltage range: -10V－10V (input impedance 34kΩ);
AI4- differential input
Input current range: 0－20mA (input impedance 500Ω)
Programmable bipolar optional input signal
Digital input DI7－DI9 Digital input 7－9 Input voltage range: 0－30VDC
Input impedance: 4.7kΩ
R2A/R2B/R2C Programmable output, contact rating: 250VAC/3A or
Relay R3A/R3B/R3C Relay contact 30VDC/1A
output output RB、RC: Normally closed;
R4A/R4B/R4C RA、RC: Normally open
9
GND Analogue ground Analogue ground, isolated to COM
Digital input use the +24V, maximum allowable output
P24 +24V power
current is 200mA
Power Defaulted the SEL and the P24 are short connected.
supply Digital input
SEL When using the external power to drive the DI7－DI9, it
common terminal
need disconnect the SEL and the P24
Digital reference
COM Digital ground
ground

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―131―

Chapter 9 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
9.1.2 Wire Jumper Description of Extension I/O Card
Jumper Function and setting description Factory setting
AI3 analogue input channel can select voltage or current signal: CN2
3
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN2 are short-circuited, AI3 channel
V
CN2 inputs voltage singal;
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN2 are short-circuited, AI3 channel I
inputs current singal. 1
AI4 analogue input channel can select voltage or current signal:
CN3
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN3 are short-circuited, AI4 channel
3
inputs voltage singal; V
CN3
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN3 are short-circuited, AI4 channel
inputs current singal. I
1
Note: Need to short-circuits pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN4.
AI4 analogue input channel can select thermistor:
3
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN4 are short-circuited, AI4 by V

CN4
CN4 external thermistor as motor overheat detection signal input;
When pin 2 and pin 3 of CN4 are short-circuited, AI4 channel R
1
inputs reference analogue.

9.1.3 Terminal Connection of Extension I/O card

Wiring of analogue input terminal
AI3 with the AI2 of control terminal has same wiring, see analog input terminal of the section 4.4.4
Control Terminal Connection, shown as Figure 4-20.
When AI4 is used as reference analogue input terminal, the wiring is shown as Figure 9-3 and
AI4+ as analogue signal input.

AI4+ Analogue input

-10—+10V or
I/O card 0—20mA
AI4-

GND
PE
Figure 9-3 Wiring of AI4 selected analogue input terminal

―132― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 9 Options
When AI4 is used as motor overheat detection signal input terminal, the wiring is shown as Figure
9-4. Motor stator coil embedded of the thermistor connected to the analog input, and need to set
jumper correctly.
+5V
Jumper setting
10k AI4+

Thermistor
CN3
I/O card 3 3
V V
AI4-

CN4
GND I 1 R 1
PE
Figure 9-4 Wiring of AI4 as over-heated signal detection input terminal
Wiring of digital input terminal
Extension I/O card digital input terminals (DI7—DI9) have the same connection with control
board digital input terminals (DI1—DI6), please refer to section 4.4.4 digital input terminal wiring
of Control Terminal Connection.

9.2 Plastic Interface Card (HD30-PIO)

HD30 series inverters can use plastic interface card (HD30-PIO), HD30-PIO is specific
development for injection molding machine industry, mainly provide two way isolated selectable
sampling 0－24V voltage, 0－1A current signal analogue input channels
Terminal arrangement is shown as Figure 9-5 and the terminal functions are as Table 9-2.

To connect the control board HD30-PIO

Jumper Jumper
CN2 CN3

QI1 QV1 CM1 QI2 QV2 CM2

Plastic interface
card terminal

Figure 9-5 HD30-PIO 9

Table 9-2 HD30-PIO function description
Item Terminal Name Description Reference function
QI1－CM1 Current input Input: 0－1A
Channel 1 Reference function AI3
QV1－CM1 Voltage input Input: 0－24V
QI2－CM2 Current input Input: 0－1A
Channel 2 Reference function AI4
QV2－CM2 Voltage input Input: 0－24V

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―133―

Chapter 9 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
HD30-PIO jumper description is shown as Table 9-3.
Table 9-3 HD30-PIO jumper description
Jumper Function and setting description Factory setting
Analogue input channel 1:
1
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN2 are short-circuited, channel 1 V

CN2
CN2 inputs voltage;
When pin 2 and pin 3 of the CN2 are short-circuited, channel 1 I
3
inputs current.
Analogue input channel 2:
1
When pin 1 and pin 2 of the CN3 are short-circuited, channel 2 V

CN3
CN3 inputs voltage;
When pin2 and pin 3 of the CN3 are short-circuited, channel 2 I
3
inputs current.

9.3 Panel Installation Assembly

The panel installation assembly includes mounting base and extension cable.
9.3.1 Mounting Base
The panel mounting base is an accessory. If needed, please order goods.
Model: HD-KMB. The mounting base and its size are shown as Figure 9-6 and the unit is mm.
2.5
1.8 ± 0.1
44.8

76 ± 0.2

Mounting base
134.5 +0.1
134 ± 0.2

0
142

Mounting size

86 76.5 +0.1
0

Figure 9-6 Mounting base and its size

―134― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 9 Options
9.3.2 Extension Cable
The panel extension cable is an accessory. If needed, please order goods.
The models are as follows:
• 1m extension cable to panel: HD-CAB-1M
• 2m extension cable to panel: HD-CAB-2M
• 3m extension cable to panel: HD-CAB-3M
• 6m extension cable to panel: HD-CAB-6M

9.4 Power Regenerative Unit

Please refer to HDRU Series Power Regenerative Unit User Manual for more details.

9.5 Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Selection

The braking unit has 2 models: HDBU-4T150 (the maximum braking current is 150A) and
HDBU-4T250 (the maximum braking current is 250A). If needed, please order goods. Refer to
the HDBU Series Dynamic Braking Unit User Manual for more details.
The braking resistor selection is shown as Table 9-4.
The connection of braking unit and the braking resistor is shown as section 4.3.2 of Power
Terminal Wiring (page 23).
Table 9-4 Recommendation for the braking unit and braking resistor
Adaptive Braking unit Braking resistor Braking resistor
Model
motor model resistance power
HD30-2D0P4G 0.4 kW Built-in 200－300 Ω 50 W
HD30-2D0P7G 0.75 kW Built-in 150－250 Ω 80 W
HD30-2D1P5G 1.5 kW Built-in 100－150 Ω 100 W
HD30-2D2P2G 2.2 kW Built-in 80－100 Ω 200 W
HD30-2T3P7G 3.7 kW Built-in 60－80 Ω 300 W
HD30-2T5P5G 5.5 kW Built-in 40－50 Ω 500 W
HD30-2T7P5G 7.5 kW Built-in 30－40 Ω 700 W
HD30-2T011G 11 kW Optional 20－25 Ω 1 kW
HD30-2T015G 15 kW Optional 15－20 Ω 1.5 kW
HD30-2T018G 18.5 kW Optional 10－15 Ω 2 kW 9
HD30-2T022G 22 kW Optional 10－15 Ω 2.5 kW
HD30-2T030G 30 kW Optional 8－10 Ω 3 kW
HD30-2T037G 37 kW Optional 6－8 Ω 3.5 kW
HD30-2T045G 45 kW HDBU-4T150 4－6 Ω 4.5 kW
HD30-2T055G 55 kW HDBU-4T150 4－6 Ω 4.5 kW
HD30-2T075G 75 kW HDBU-4T250 4－6 Ω *2 4.5 kW *2

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―135―

Chapter 9 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Adaptive Braking unit Braking resistor Braking resistor

Model
motor model resistance power
HD30-4T0P7G 0.75 kW Built-in 250－350 Ω 100 W
HD30-4T1P5G 1.5 kW Built-in 200－300 Ω 200 W
HD30-4T2P2G 2.2 kW Built-in 150－250 Ω 250 W
HD30-4T3P7G/5P5P 3.7/5.5 kW Built-in 100－150 Ω 300 W
HD30-4T5P5G/7P5P 5.5/7.5 kW Built-in 80－100 Ω 500 W
HD30-4T7P5G/011P 7.5/11 kW Built-in 60－80 Ω 700 W
HD30-4T011G/015P 11/15 kW Built-in 40－50 Ω 1 kW
HD30-4T015G/018P 15/18.5 kW Built-in 30－40 Ω 1.5 kW
HD30-4T018G/022P 18.5/22 kW Built-in 25－30 Ω 2 kW
HD30-4T022G/030P 22/30 kW Optional 20－25 Ω 2.5 kW
HD30-4T030G/037P 30/37 kW Optional 15－20 Ω 3 kW
HD30-4T037G/045P 37/45 kW Optional 15－20 Ω 3.5 kW
HD30-4T045G/055P 45/55 kW Optional 10－15 Ω 4.5 kW
HD30-4T055G/075P 55/75 kW Optional 10－15 Ω 5.5 kW
HD30-4T075G/090P 75/90 kW HDBU-4T150 8－10 Ω 7.5 kW
HD30-4T090G/110P 90/110 kW HDBU-4T150 8－10 Ω 9 kW
HD30-4T110G/132P 110/132 kW HDBU-4T150 6－8 Ω 11 kW
HD30-4T132G/160P 132/160 kW HDBU-4T250 6－8 Ω 13.2 kW
HD30-4T160G/200P 160/200 kW HDBU-4T250 4－6 Ω 16 kW
HD30-4T200G/220P 200/220 kW HDBU-4T250 4－6 Ω 20 kW
HD30-4T220G/250P 220/250 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 6－8 Ω *2 11 kW *2
HD30-4T250G/280P 250/280 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 6－8 Ω *2 12.5 kW *2
HD30-4T280G/315P 280/315 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4－6 Ω *2 14 kW *2
HD30-4T315G/355P 315/355 kW HDBU-4T250 *2 4－6 Ω *2 16 kW *2
HD30-4T355G/400P 355/400 kW HDBU-4T250 *3 4－6 Ω *3 11 kW *3
HD30-4T400G/450P 400/450 kW HDBU-4T250 *3 4－6 Ω *3 14 kW *3
Remark: *2 or *3 is meaning 2 or 3 parallel way.

―136― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Chapter 9 Options

9.6 Reactor Selection

The reactor selections are shown as Table 9-5 and Table 9-6.
Table 9-5 AC reactor selection
AC input reactor AC output reactor
Model Parameter Parameter
Model Model
(mH-A) (mH-A)
HD30-4T037G/045P HD-AIL-4T037 0.19-75 HD-AOL-4T037 0.08-80
HD30-4T045G/055P HD-AIL-4T045 0.16-90 HD-AOL-4T045 0.06-100
HD30-4T055G/075P HD-AIL-4T055 0.13-115 HD-AOL-4T055 0.04-125
HD30-4T075G/090P HD-AIL-4T075 0.093-150 HD-AOL-4T075 0.035-160
HD30-4T090G/110P HD-AIL-4T090 0.08-180 HD-AOL-4T090 0.03-200
HD30-4T110G/132P HD-AIL-4T110 0.067-210 HD-AOL-4T110 0.02-225
HD30-4T132G/160P HD-AIL-4T132 0.055-255 HD-AOL-4T132 0.016-280
HD30-4T160G/200P HD-AIL-4T160 0.046-305 HD-AOL-4T160 0.013-320
HD30-4T200G/220P HD-AIL-4T200 0.037-380 HD-AOL-4T200 0.011-400
HD30-4T220G/250P HD-AIL-4T220 0.034-415 HD-AOL-4T220 0.01-450
HD30-4T250G/280P HD-AIL-4T25 HD-AOL-4T250
0.026-530 0.009-560
HD30-4T280G/315P HD-AIL-4T280 HD-AOL-4T280
HD30-4T315G/355P HD-AIL-4T315 0.023-600 HD-AOL-4T315 0.007-630
HD30-4T355G/400P HD-AIL-4T355 HD-AOL-4T355
0.019-760 0.006-800
HD30-4T400G/450P HD-AIL-4T400 HD-AOL-4T400

Table 9-6 DC reactor selection

DC reactor
Model
Model Parameter (mH-A)
HD30-4T037G/045P HD-DCL-4T037 0.35-100
HD30-4T045G/055P HD-DCL-4T045 0.29-120
HD30-4T055G/075P HD-DCL-4T055 0.23-150
HD30-4T075G/090P HD-DCL-4T075 0.17-200
HD30-4T090G/110P HD-DCL-4T090 0.14-240
HD30-4T110G/132P HD-DCL-4T110 0.12-290 9
HD30-4T132G/160P HD-DCL-4T132 0.11-330
HD30-4T160G/200P HD-DCL-4T160 0.09-400
HD30-4T200G/220P HD-DCL-4T200 0.07-500
HD30-4T220G/250P HD-DCL-4T220 0.06-550
HD30-4T250G/280P HD-DCL-4T250
0.05-700
HD30-4T280G/315P HD-DCL-4T280
HD30-4T315G/355P Built-in －
HD30-4T355G/400P Built-in －
HD30-4T400G/450P Built-in －

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual ―137―

Chapter 9 Options Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

9.7 Protective Cover

The protective cover is an accessory. If needed, please order goods.
Model: HD-CK-Frame4. The protective cover is applied for Frame1－Frame4 of product models,
and each needs 2 protective covers.

―138― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Appendix A Parameters
Attributes are changed:
”*”: It denotes that the value of this parameter is the actual value which cannot be modified.
“×”: It denotes that the setting of this parameter cannot be modified when the inverter is in run
status.
”○”: It denotes that the setting of this parameter can be modified when the inverter is in run
status.
“―”: The same as the mapping functional parameter.

: It denotes that this parameter is enabled when using corresponding extension option.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －139－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Group d00 Status Display Parameters (refer to pages 54－59)
d00.00 Series of the inverter 0x10－0x50 *
Software version of the
d00.01 00.00－99.99 *
control board
d00.02 Reserved
Special software
d00.03 version of the control 00.00－99.99 *
board
d00.04 Reserved
Software version of the
d00.05 00.00－99.99 *
display panel
d00.06 Custom series No. 0－9999 *
Units: Display the current
driving motor
0: Motor 1
Motor and control 1: Motor 2
d00.07 *
mode Tens: Control mode
0: V/f control without PG
1: Reserved
2: Vector control without PG
Rated current of the 5.5kW or below type: 0.01A
d00.08 *
inverter 7.5kW or above type: 0.1A
Extension function of
d00.09 0: Standard inverter *
the inverter
Units:
Bit0: Inverter fault
Bit1: Run/stop
Bit2: Forward/reverse
Bit3: Zero speed running

Tens:
Bit1&Bit0: Acceleration/
deceleration/ constant
Bit2: Reserved
d00.10 Inverter status Bit3: DC braking (including *
start and stop DC braking)

Hundreds:
Bit0: Parameter auto-tuning
Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: Speed limiting value
Bit3: Reserved

Thousands:
Bit0: Stall overvoltage

―140― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Bit1: Current limiting
Bit2: Reserved
Bit3: Reserved
Master setting
d00.11 0－4 *
frequency source
Master setting
d00.12 0.01－400.00Hz *
frequency
Auxiliary setting
d00.13 0.01－400.00Hz *
frequency
d00.14 Setting frequency 0.01－400.00Hz *
Reference frequency
d00.15 (after acceleration/ 0.01－400.00Hz *
deceleration)
d00.16 Output frequency 0.01－400.00Hz *
d00.17 Setting speed 0－60000rpm *
d00.18 Running speed 0－60000rpm *
0: Positive sequence, L1(R)
preceding L2(S) preceding
Three-phase power
L3(T)
d00.19 supply input sequence *
1: Negative sequence, L1(R)
phase
preceding L3(T) preceding
L2(S)
d00.20 Output voltage 0－999V *
d00.21 Output current Actual value, unit is 0.1A *
d00.22 Reserved
0－300.0% (motor rated
d00.23 Output torque *
torque)
d00.24 Output power Actual value, unit is 0.1kW *
d00.25 DC bus voltage 0－999V *
Potentiometer input
d00.26 voltage of the display 0.00－5.00V *
panel
d00.27 AI1 input voltage 0.00－10.00V *
AI1 input voltage (after
d00.28 0.00－10.00V *
disposal)
d00.29 AI2 input voltage -10.00－10.00V * A
AI2 input voltage (after
d00.30 -10.00－10.00V *
disposal)
d00.31 AI3 input voltage -10.00－10.00V *
AI3 input voltage (after
d00.32 -10.00－10.00V *
disposal)
d00.33 AI4 input voltage -10.00－10.00V *
AI4 input voltage (after
d00.34 -10.00－10.00V *
disposal)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －141－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
DI6 terminal pulse
d00.35 0－50000Hz *
input frequency
d00.36 AO1 output 0.00－10.00V *
d00.37 AO2 output 0.00－10.00V *
High-speed output
d00.38 0－50000Hz *
pulse frequency
d00.39 Heatsink temperature 0.0－999.9℃ *
d00.40 Setting line speed 0－max output line speed *
d00.41 Reference line speed 0－max output line speed *
d00.42 Reserved
d00.43 Reserved
d00.44 Process PID reference -100.0－100.0% *
d00.45 Process PID feedback -100.0－100.0% *
d00.46 Process PID tolerance -100.0－100.0% *
Process PID integral
d00.47 -100.0－100.0% *
item
d00.48 Process PID output -100.0－100.0% *
d00.49 External counting value 0－9999 *
Bit0－Bit8 corresponding to
DI1－DI9
0: Input terminal disconnect
with common terminal
d00.50 Input terminal status 1: Input terminal connect with *
common terminal

Only using HD30-EIO can

the DI7－DI9 be enabled.
Bit0－Bit1 corresponding to
DO1－DO2
Bit2－Bit5 corresponding to
RLY1－RLY4
0: Output terminal disconnect
with common terminal
d00.51 Output terminal status *
1: Output terminal connect
with common terminal

Only using HD30-EIO can

the RLY2－RLY4 be
enabled.
0: Normal
1: Communication timeout
MODBUS 2: Incorrect data frame head
d00.52 *
communication status 3: Incorrect data frame
checking
4: Incorrect data frame

―142― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
content
d00.53 Actual length 0－65535m *
d00.54 Total length 0－65535km *
d00.55 Total time at power-on 0－65535h *
d00.56 Total time at operation 0－65535h *
High bit of motor total
d00.57 0－65535k kW.h *
energy consumption
Low bit of motor total
d00.58 0.0－999.9kW.h *
energy consumption
High bit of energy con.
d00.59 0－65535k kW.h *
at this time running
Low bit of energy con.
d00.60 0.0－999.9kW.h *
at this time running
1－100
d00.61 Present fault *
100: means undervoltage
Group F00 Basic Parameter (refer to pages 59－62)
F00.00 Reserved
0: V/f control without PG
F00.01 Control mode selection 1: Reserved 0 1 ×
2: Vector control without PG
0: G type
F00.02 Inverter type setting 0 1 ×
1: P type
0: Motor 1
F00.03 Motor selection 0 1 ×
1: Motor 2
0: Option is invalid
HD30 general
1: HD30-EIO is valid
F00.04 extension option 0 1 ×
2: Reserved
selection
3: HD30-PIO is valid
HD30 extension
F00.05 0: No extension application 0 1 ×
application function
Inverter max. output
F00.06 50.00－400.00Hz 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
Upper limit of operation 0: Digital setting (F00.08)
F00.07 frequency setting 1: Analogue input AI setting 0 1 ×
source 2: Terminal pulse setting
A
Upper limit of operation
F00.08 0.00－F00.06 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
Lower limit of operation
F00.09 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
0: Display panel digital
Frequency setting setting
F00.10 0 1 ×
sources selection 1: Terminal digital setting
2: SCI communication setting

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －143－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
3: AI analogue setting
4: Terminal pulse setting

0: Display panel running

source
Command setting
F00.11 1: Terminal running source 0 1 ×
source selection
2: SCI communication
running source
0: Switch the display panel
running direction
Function selection of
F00.12 1: Switch local and remote 2 1 ○
the multi-function key
control
2: Multi-function key is invalid
Starting frequency
F00.13 0.00－upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
digital setting
Units: Frequency setting
save selection at power
outage
0: Frequency setting will not
be saved at power outage
1: Frequency setting will be
saved to F00.13 at power
outage

Tens: Frequency setting

control selection at stop
0: Frequency setting will not
be restored to F00.13 at stop
1: Frequency setting will be
UP/DOWN digital restored to F00.13 at stop
F00.14 1001 1 ×
setting control
Hundreds: Communication
setting frequency storage
selection
0: Do not save when power
is off.
1: Save to F00.13 when
power is off.

Thousands: Switch the

frequency channel to the
analogue selection
0: Do not save
1: Save the frequency set by
display pane
Jog operation
F00.15 frequency digital 0.00－upper limit 5.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
setting 1

―144― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
F00.16 Interval of jog operation 0.0－100.0s 0.0s 0.1s ×
0: The same as run
Operation direction
F00.17 command 0 1 ×
selection
1: Opposite to run command
0: Reverse operation is
permitted
F00.18 Anti-reverse operation 0 1 ×
1: Reverse operation is
prohibitted
Dead time of direction
F00.19 0.0－3600.0s 0.0s 0.1s ×
switch
Key enable of optional 0: Enabled
F00.20 0 1 ○
display panel 1: Disabled
Dormant function 0: Disabled
F00.21 0 1 ×
selection 1: Enabled
Dormancy wake up
F00.22 0.0－360.0s 0.0s 0.1s ○
time
Group F01 Protection of Parameters ( refer to pages 62－64)
F01.00 User’s password 00000－65535 0 1 ○
Units:
0: Full menu mode
1: Checking menu mode
(Only different from factory
setting parameters can be
displayed)

F01.01 Menu mode selection Tens: 10 1 ○

0: Does not lock the
parameter mapping
relationship of Group U and
Group F
1: Lock the parameter
mapping relationship of
Group U and Group F
0: No operation
1: Restore to factory settings
2: Download the display
panel EEPROM parameter 1
to the current function code
A
settings
Function code 3: Download the display
F01.02 0 1 ×
parameter initialization panel EEPROM parameter 2
to the current function code
settings
4: Clear fault information
5: Download the display
panel EEPROM parameter 1
to the current function code

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －145－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
settings (including the motor
parameters).
6: Download the display
panel EEPROM parameter 2
to the current function code
settings (including the motor
parameters).
0: No operation
1: Upload the current
function code settings to the
Display panel display panel EEPROM
F01.03 EEPROM parameter parameter 1 0 1 ○
initialization 2: Upload the current
function code settings to the
display panel EEPROM
parameter 2
Group F02 Run/Stop Control Parameters (refer to pages 64－68)
0: From the DWELL
frequency to start
1: Brake first and then start
from DWELL frequency
F02.00 Start mode selection 2: Start after speed tracking. 0 1 ×
If the result of speed tracking
is smaller than F02.02, it will
start from the starting
DWELL frequency
F02.01 Starting delay time 0.00－10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
Start DWELL
F02.02 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency setting
Retention time of
F02.03 starting DWELL 0.00－10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
frequency
DC braking current 0－100% (inverter’s rated
F02.04 50% 1% ×
setting current)
DC braking time at
F02.05 0.00－60.00s 0.50s 0.01s ×
start
0: Searching based on
Speed tracking mode residual voltage
F02.06 0 1 ×
selection 1: Searching based on
current
0: From the max. output
frequency to start speed
Speed search mode searching
F02.07 1 1 ×
based on current 1: From the stopping
frequency to start speed
searching
F02.08 Setting reference 0－100% (motor’s rated 50% 1% ×

―146― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
current for speed current)
search
Acc./Dec. time of the
F02.09 1.0－50.0s 5.0s 0.1s ×
speed search
Waiting time of speed
F02.10 0.1－5.0s 1.0s 0.1s ×
search
V/f ratio of speed
F02.11 0.0－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ×
search
Disposal time after
F02.12 0.01－5.00s 1.00s 0.01s ×
speed search
0: Decelerate to stop
(decreases to DWELL
frequency setting and holds
on retention time of DWELL
F02.13 Stop mode selection 0 1 ×
frequency, then it will stop)
1: Coast to stop
2: Decelerate to stop with DC
braking
DWELL frequency
F02.14 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
setting at stop
Retention time of
F02.15 DWELL frequency at 0.00－10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
stop
DC braking initial
F02.16 0.00－50.00Hz 0.50Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency at stop
DC braking waiting
F02.17 0.00－10.00s 0.00s 0.01s ×
time at stop
F02.18 DC braking time at stop 0.00－10.00s 0.50s 0.01s ×
0: The jog functions of start
and stop mode etc are
invalid.
F02.19 Jog control mode 0 1 ×
1: The jog functions of start
and stop mode etc are
enabled.
Group F03 Acceleration/Deceleration Parameters (refer to pages 68－70)
Acc./Dec. mode 0: Linear Acc. or Dec.
F03.00 0 1 ○
selection 1: S-curve Acc. or Dec.
F03.01 Acceleration time 1 0.1－6000.0s 0.1s ○
A
15kW or
F03.02 Deceleration time 1 0.1－6000.0s below 0.1s ○
F03.03 Acceleration time 2 0.1－6000.0s models: 0.1s ○
10.0s
F03.04 Deceleration time 2 0.1－6000.0s 0.1s ○
F03.05 Acceleration time 3 0.1－6000.0s 0.1s ○
18.5－55
F03.06 Deceleration time 3 0.1－6000.0s kW: 30.0s 0.1s ○
F03.07 Acceleration time 4 0.1－6000.0s 0.1s ○
F03.08 Deceleration time 4 0.1－6000.0s other 0.1s ○

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －147－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
models:
60.0s
Switching frequency of
F03.09 acceleration time 2 and 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
time 1
Switching frequency of
F03.10 deceleration time 2 and 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
time 1
S-curve characteristic
F03.11 time at starting 0.00－2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
acceleration
S-curve characteristic
F03.12 time at ending 0.00－2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
acceleration
S-curve characteristic
F03.13 time at starting 0.00－2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
deceleration
S-curve characteristic
F03.14 time at ending 0.00－2.50s 0.20s 0.01s ○
deceleration
Acceleration time of jog
F03.15 0.1－6000.0s 6.0s 0.1s ○
operation
Deceleration time of
F03.16 0.1－6000.0s 6.0s 0.1s ○
jog operation
Deceleration time of
F03.17 0.1－6000.0s 10.0s 0.1s ○
emergency stop
Group F04 Process PID Control (refer to pages 70－72)
Process PID control 0: PID control is disabled
F04.00 0 1 ×
selection 1: PID control is enabled
0: Digital reference
Reference source
F04.01 1: AI analogue reference 0 1 ×
selection
2: Terminal pulse reference
Feedback source 0: AI analogue feedback
F04.02 0 1 ×
selection 1: Terminal pulse feedback
Setting digital
F04.03 -10.00－10.00V 0.00V 0.01V ○
reference
F04.04 Proportional gain (P) 0.00－10.00 2.00 0.01 ○
F04.05 Integral time (I) 0.00－10.00s 1.00s 0.01s ○
F04.06 Integral upper limit 0.00－upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0.00－10.00s
F04.07 Differential time (D) The differential is disabled 0.00s 0.01s ○
when F04.07 is set to 0
Differential amplitude
F04.08 0.00－upper limit 20.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
limit value
F04.09 Sampling cycle (T) 0.01－50.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○

―148― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
F04.10 Bias limit 0.0－20.0% (reference) 2.0% 0.1% ○
0: Set by F04.13
PID regulator upper
F04.11 1: Set by AI analogue value 0 1 ×
limit source selection
2: Set by terminal pulse input
0: Set by F04.14
PID regulator lower
F04.12 1: Set by AI analogue value 0 1 ×
limit source selection
2: Set by terminal pulse input
PID regulator upper
F04.13 0.00－upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
limit value
PID regulator lower
F04.14 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
limit value
PID regulator 0: Positive
F04.15 0 1 ×
characteristic 1: Negative
0: Stop integral regulation
when the frequency reaches
the upper or lower limit
Integral regulation
F04.16 1: Continue the integral 1 1 ×
selection
regulation when the
frequency reaches the upper
or lower limit
F04.17 PID output filter time 0.01－10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
0: PID regulation disable
reverse (When PID output is
PID output reverse negative, 0 is the limit)
F04.18 0 ×
selection 1: PID regulation enable
reverse (When F00.18 = 1
disable reverse, 0 is the limit)
PID output reverse
F04.19 0.00Hz－upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency’s upper limit
Group F05 External Reference Curve Parameters (refer to pages 72－74)
Units: AI1 characteristic
curve selection
Tens: AI2 characteristic
curve selection
Hundreds: AI3 characteristic
curve selection
Thousands: AI4
External reference characteristic curve selection
A
F05.00 00000 1 ×
curve selection Ten thousands: Pulse input
characteristic curve selection
0: Line 1
1: Line 2
2: Polyline
Only when using HD30-EIO
can hundreds and thousands
be enabled.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －149－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Minimum reference of
F05.01 0.0－F05.03 0.0% 0.1% ○
line 1
Minimum reference
F05.02 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
line 1
Maximum reference of
F05.03 F05.01－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
line 1
Maximum reference
F05.04 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
line 1
Minimum reference of
F05.05 0.0－F05.07 0.0% 0.1% ○
line 2
Minimum reference
F05.06 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
line 2
Maximum reference of
F05.07 F05.05－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
line 2
Maximum reference
F05.08 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
line 2
Maximum reference of
F05.09 F05.11－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Maximum reference
F05.10 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Inflection point 2
F05.11 F05.13－F05.09 100.0% 0.1% ○
reference of polyline
Inflection point 2
F05.12 0.0－100.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value
Inflection point 1
F05.13 F05.15－F05.11 0.0% 0.1% ○
reference of polyline
Inflection point 1
F05.14 0.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
corresponding value
Minimum reference of
F05.15 0.0－F05.13 0.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
Minimum reference
F05.16 corresponding value of 0.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
polyline
F05.17 Skip frequency 1 F00.09－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
F05.18 Skip frequency 2 F00.09－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
F05.19 Skip frequency 3 F00.09－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
Range of skip
F05.20 0.00－30.00Hz 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
Jog operation
F05.21 0.00－upper limit 5.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
frequency digital

―150― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
setting 2
Group F06 MS SPEED and Simple PLC (refer to pages 74－78)
Multi-step frequency
F06.00 F00.09－upper limit 3.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 1
Multi-step frequency
F06.01 F00.09－upper limit 6.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 2
Multi-step frequency
F06.02 F00.09－upper limit 9.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 3
Multi-step frequency
F06.03 F00.09－upper limit 12.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 4
Multi-step frequency
F06.04 F00.09－upper limit 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 5
Multi-step frequency
F06.05 F00.09－upper limit 18.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 6
Multi-step frequency
F06.06 F00.09－upper limit 21.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 7
Multi-step frequency
F06.07 F00.09－upper limit 24.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 8
Multi-step frequency
F06.08 F00.09－upper limit 27.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 9
Multi-step frequency
F06.09 F00.09－upper limit 30.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 10
Multi-step frequency
F06.10 F00.09－upper limit 33.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 11
Multi-step frequency
F06.11 F00.09－upper limit 36.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 12
Multi-step frequency
F06.12 F00.09－upper limit 39.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 13
Multi-step frequency
F06.13 F00.09－upper limit 42.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 14
Multi-step frequency
F06.14 F00.09－upper limit 45.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
command 15
Simple PLC control 0: No PLC operation
F06.15 0 1 ×
selection 1: Enabling PLC operation
Units: PLC operation mode
selection
0: Stop after single cycle A
operation
1: Maintain the final value
Simple PLC operation
F06.16 after single cycle of PLC 0000 1 ×
mode selection
operation
2: Cycle operation

Tens: PLC operation restart

mode selection after pause

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －151－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: Start from step 1
1: Continue to operate from
the step where the inverter
pauses
2: Continue to operate at the
frequency when the inverter
pauses

Hundreds: Save the PLC

status after power failure
0: Not be saved
1: Saved

Thousands: time unit

selection of the PLC step
0: Second (s)
1: Minute (m)
F06.17 Setting of PLC step 1 Units: PLC running 000 1 ○
F06.19 Setting of PLC step 2 frequency selection 000 1 ○
0: Multi- step frequency
F06.21 Setting of PLC step 3 000 1 ○
command
F06.23 Setting of PLC step 4 000 1 ○
1: Depend on F00.10
F06.25 Setting of PLC step 5 Tens: Operation direction 000 1 ○
F06.27 Setting of PLC step 6 selection of PLC at different 000 1 ○
F06.29 Setting of PLC step 7 step 000 1 ○
0: Forward
F06.31 Setting of PLC step 8 000 1 ○
1: Reverse
F06.33 Setting of PLC step 9 000 1 ○
2: Depend on run command
F06.35 Setting of PLC step 10 000 1 ○
F06.37 Setting of PLC step 11 Hundreds: Acc./Dec. time 000 1 ○
F06.39 Setting of PLC step 12 selection of PLC at different 000 1 ○
steps
F06.41 Setting of PLC step 13 000 1 ○
0: Acc./Dec. time 1
F06.43 Setting of PLC step 14 000 1 ○
1: Acc./Dec. time 2
2: Acc./Dec. time 3
F06.45 Setting of PLC step 15 000 1 ○
3: Acc./Dec. time 4
F06.18 Running time of step 1 0.0－3276.7 5.0 0.1 ○
F06.20 Running time of step 2 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.22 Running time of step 3 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.24 Running time of step 4 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.26 Running time of step 5 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.28 Running time of step 6 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.30 Running time of step 7 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.32 Running time of step 8 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.34 Running time of step 9 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
F06.36 Running time of step 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○

―152― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
10
F06.38 Running time of step 11 0.0－3276.7 0.0 0.1 ○
Running time of step 0.0－3276.7
F06.40 0.0 0.1 ○
12
Running time of step 0.0－3276.7
F06.42 0.0 0.1 ○
13
Running time of step 0.0－3276.7
F06.44 0.0 0.1 ○
14
Running time of step 0.0－3276.7
F06.46 0.0 0.1 ○
15
Group F07 Wobble Operation Parameters (refer to pages 78－80)
Wobble operation 0: Disabled
F07.00 0 1 ×
selection 1: Enabled
Units: Start mode of wobble
operation
0: Auto start (according to
F07.03)
1: Manual start

Tens: Wobble operation

amplitude
0: Relative to the wobble
central frequency
1: Relative to the maximum
output frequency

Wobble operation Hundreds: Restart mode of

F07.01 0000 1 ×
mode wobble operation
0: The inverter restarts the
wobble operation as per the
recorded frequency and
direction when it stops last
time
1: The inverter restarts the
wobble operation from 0 Hz

Thousands: Save the wobble

operation parameters at A
power outage
0: Saved
1: Not be saved
Preset wobble
F07.02 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
frequency
Holding time of preset
F07.03 0.0－999.9s 0.0s 0.1s ×
wobble frequency
F07.04 Wobble amplitude 0.0－50.0% 0.0% 0.1% ×

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －153－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
F07.05 Jump frequency 0.0－F07.04 0.0% 0.1% ×
F07.06 Wobble operation cycle 0.0－999.9s 10.0s 0.1s ×
Rising time of triangle
F07.07 0.0－100.0% (F07.06) 50.0% 0.1% ×
wave
Group F08 Asynchronous Motor 1 Parameters (refer to pages 80－82)
F08.00 Rated power of motor 1 0.2－500.0kW 0.1kW ×
Rated voltage of motor
F08.01 0－inverter’s rated voltage Dependent 1V ×
1
on inverter
5.5kW above: 0.0－999.9A 0.1A
Rated current of motor model
F08.02 5.5kW or below: 0.00－ ×
1 0.01A
99.99A
Rated frequency of
F08.03 1.0－400.0Hz 50.0Hz 0.1Hz ×
motor 1
F08.04 Rated speed of motor 1 1－24000rpm 1500rpm 1rpm ×
Dependent
F08.05 Power factor of motor 1 0.001－1.000 on inverter 0.001 ×
model
0: Auto-tuning is disabled
Parameter auto-tuning
F08.06 1: Stationary auto-tuning 0 1 ×
of motor 1
2: Rotary auto-tuning
5.5kW above: 0.000－
0.001Ω
Stator resistance of 9.999Ω
F08.07 ×
motor 1 5.5kW or below: 0.00－
0.01Ω
99.99Ω
5.5kW above: 0.000－
0.001Ω
Rotor resistance of 9.999Ω
F08.08 ×
motor 1 5.5kW or below: 0.00－
0.01Ω
99.99Ω
5.5kW above: 0.00－ Dependent 0.01m
Leakage inductance of 500.00mH on inverter H
F08.09 ×
motor 1 5.5kW or below: 0.0－ model
0.1mH
5000.0mH
5.5kW above: 0.00－ 0.01m
Mutual inductance of 500.00mH H
F08.10 ×
motor 1 5.5kW or below: 0.0－
0.1mH
5000.0mH
5.5kW above: 0.0－999.9A 0.1A
Idling exciting current
F08.11 5.5kW or below: 0.00－ ×
of motor 1 0.01A
99.99A
F08.12 Reserved
F08.13 Reserved
F08.14 Reserved
Group F09 V/f Control Parameters (refer to pages 82－85)

―154― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: Line
1: Square curve
V/f curve selection of
F09.00 2: 1.2 exponential curve 0 1 ×
motor 1
3: 1.7 exponential curve
4: User-defined curve
V/f frequency value F3
F09.01 F09.03－F08.03 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 1
V/f voltage value V3 of
F09.02 F09.04－F08.01 0V 1V ×
motor 1
V/f frequency value F2
F09.03 F09.05－F09.01 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 1
V/f voltage value V2 of
F09.04 F09.06－F09.02 0V 1V ×
motor 1
V/f frequency value F1
F09.05 0.00－F09.03 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 1
V/f voltage value V1 of
F09.06 0－F09.04 0V 1V ×
motor 1
45kW and
below: 2.0%

55－132kW
Torque boost of motor 0.0－30.0% inverter:
F09.07 0.1% ×
1 0.0: Auto torque boost 1.0%

160kW and
above:
0.5%
Cut-off point used for
F09.08 manual torque boost of 0.0－50.0% (F08.03) 30.0% 0.1% ○
motor 1
Slip compensation gain
F09.09 0.0－300.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
of motor 1
Slip compensation filter
F09.10 0.01－10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
time of motor 1
Slip compensation
F09.11 0.0－250.0% 200.0% 0.1% ×
limitation of motor 1
Compensation
F09.12
constant of motor 1
0.1－25.0s 2.0s 0.1s ○ A
F09.13 Reserved
0: Disabled
AVR function of motor 1: Enabled all the time
F09.14 1 1 ○
1 2: Disabled in deceleration
process
0: Oscillation suppression is
Oscillation-suppression
F09.15 dependent on the motor’s 1 1 ○
mode of motor 1
exciting current component

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －155－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
1: Oscillation suppression is
dependent on the motor’s
torque current component
Oscillation-suppression
F09.16 0－200 50 1 ○
coefficient of motor 1
F09.17 Reserved
F09.18 Reserved
Group F10 Motor 1 Vector Control Speed-loop Parameters (refer to pages 85－86)
Speed control
F10.00 proportional gain 1 of 0.1－200.0 20.0 0.1 ○
motor 1
Speed control integral
F10.01 0.00－10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
time 1 of motor 1
Speed control
F10.02 proportional gain 2 of 0.1－200.0 20.0 0.1 ○
motor 1
Speed control integral
F10.03 0.00－10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
time 2 of motor 1
Speed-loop PI
F10.04 switching frequency 1 0.00－50.00Hz 10.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
of motor 1
Speed-loop PI
F10.05 switching frequency 2 0.00－50.00Hz 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
of motor 1
Speed-loop integral 0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F10.06 180.0% 0.1% ○
limitation of motor 1 current)
0.00－1.00s
Speed-loop differential
F10.07 There is not the speed-loop 0.00s 0.01s ○
time of motor 1
differential when F10.07 = 0
0.000－1.000s
Speed-loop output filter
F10.08 When F10.08 = 0, the 0.020s 0.001s ○
time of motor 1
speed-loop filter is disabled
F10.09 Reserved
F10.10 Reserved
Motor torque limitation
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F10.11 when motor 1 is 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
forward
Motor torque limitation
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F10.12 when motor 1 is 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
reverse
Recreated torque
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F10.13 limitation when motor 1 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
is forward
Recreated torque
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F10.14 limitation when motor 1 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
is reverse

―156― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Group F11 Reserved
Group F12 Reserved
Group F13 Asynchronous Motor 2 Parameters (refer to pages 86－88)
0: V/f control without PG
Control mode selection
F13.00 1: Reserved 0 1 ×
of motor 2
2: Vector control without PG
F13.01 Rated power of motor 2 0.2－500.0kW 0.1kW ×
Rated voltage of motor
F13.02 0－inverter rated voltage Dependent 1V ×
2
on inverter
5.5kW above: 0.0－999.9A 0.1A
Rated current of motor model
F13.03 5.5kW or below: 0.00－ ×
2 0.01A
99.99A
Rated frequency of
F13.04 1.0－400.0Hz 50.0Hz 0.1Hz ×
motor 2
F13.05 Rated speed of motor 2 1－24000rpm 1500rpm 1rpm ×
Dependent
F13.06 Power factor of motor 2 0.001－1.000 on inverter 0.001 ×
model
0: Auto-tuning is disabled
Parameter auto-tuning
F13.07 1: Stationary auto-tuning 0 1 ×
of motor 2
2: Rotary auto-tuning
5.5kW above: 0.000－
0.001Ω
Stator resistance of 9.999Ω
F13.08 ×
motor 2 5.5kW or below: 0.00－
0.01Ω
99.99Ω
5.5kW above: 0.000－
0.001Ω
Rotor resistance of 9.999Ω
F13.09 ×
motor 2 5.5kW or below: 0.00－
0.01Ω
99.99Ω
5.5kW or below: 0.00－ Dependent 0.01m
Leakage inductance of 500.00mH on inverter H
F13.10 ×
motor 2 5.5kW or below: 0.0－ model
0.1mH
5000.0mH
5.5kW above: 0.00－ 0.01m
Mutual inductance of 500.00mH H
F13.11 ×
motor 2 5.5kW or below: 0.0－
0.1mH
A
5000.0mH
5.5kW above: 0.0－999.9A 0.1A
Idling exciting current
F13.12 5.5kW or below: 0.00－ ×
of motor 2 0.01A
99.99A
F13.13 Reserved
F13.14 Reserved
F13.15 Reserved
F13.16 V/f curve selection of 0: Line 0 1 ×

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －157－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
motor 2 1: Square curve
2: 1.2 exponential curve
3: 1.7 exponential curve
4: User-defined curve
V/f frequency value F3
F13.17 F13.19－F13.04 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 2
V/f voltage value V3 of
F13.18 F13.20－F13.02 0V 1V ×
motor 2
V/f frequency value F2
F13.19 F13.21－F13.17 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 2
V/f voltage value V2 of
F13.20 F13.22－F13.18 0V 1V ×
motor 2
V/f frequency value F1
F13.21 0.00－F13.19 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
of motor 2
V/f voltage value V1 of
F13.22 0－F13.20 0V 1V ×
motor 2
45kW and
below: 2.0%

55－132 kW
Torque boost of motor 0.0－30.0% inverter:
F13.23 0.1% ×
2 0.0: Auto torque boost 1.0%

160kW and
above:
0.5%
Cut-off point used for
F13.24 manual torque boost of 0.0－50.0% (F13.04) 30.0% 0.1% ○
motor 2
Slip compensation gain
F13.25 0.0－300.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
of motor 2
Slip compensation filter
F13.26 0.01－10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
time of motor 2
Slip compensation
F13.27 0.0%－250.0% 200.0% 0.1% ×
limitation of motor 2
Compensation
F13.28 0.1－25.0s 2.0s 0.1s ○
constant of motor 2
F13.29 Reserved
0: Disabled
AVR function of motor 1: Enabled all the time
F13.30 1 1 ○
2 2: Disabled in deceleration
process
0: Oscillation suppression is
Oscillation-suppression dependent on the motor’s
F13.31 1 1 ○
mode of motor 2 exciting current component
1: Oscillation suppression is

―158― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
dependent on the motor’s
torque current component
Oscillation-suppression
F13.32 0－200 50 1 ○
coefficient of motor 2
F13.33 Reserved
F13.34 Reserved
Speed control
F13.35 proportional gain 1 of 0.1－200.0 20.0 0.1 ○
motor 2
Speed control integral
F13.36 0.00－10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
time 1 of motor 2
Speed control
F13.37 proportional gain 2 of 0.1－200.0 20.0 0.1 ○
motor 2
Speed control integral
F13.38 0.00－10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ○
time 2 of motor 2
Speed-loop PI
F13.39 switching frequency 1 0.00－50.00Hz 10.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
of motor 2
Speed-loop PI
F13.40 switching frequency 2 0.00－50.00Hz 15.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
of motor 2
Speed-loop integral 0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F13.41 180.0% 0.1% ○
limitation of motor 2 current)
0.00－1.00s
Speed-loop differential
F13.42 There is not the speed-loop 0.00s 0.01s ○
time of motor 2
differential when F13.42 = 0
0.000－1.000s
Speed-loop output filter
F13.43 When F13.43 = 0, the 0.020s 0.001s ○
time of motor 2
speed-loop filter is disabled
F13.44 Reserved
F13.45 Reserved
Motor torque limitation
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F13.46 when motor 2 is 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
forward
Motor torque limitation
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F13.47 when motor 2 is 180.0% 0.1% × A
current)
reverse
Recreated torque
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F13.48 limitation when motor 2 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
is forward
Recreated torque
0.0－200.0% (motor rated
F13.49 limitation when motor 2 180.0% 0.1% ×
current)
is reverse
F13.50 Reserved

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －159－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
F13.51 Reserved
F13.52 Reserved
Group F14 Reserved (refer to pages 88－89)
Group F15 Digital I/O Terminal Parameters (refer to pages 89－102)

0: Reserved
1: Inverter enabled
2: FWD function
DI1 terminal function 3: REV function
F15.00 2 1 ×
selection 4: Three-wire operation
mode
5,6,7: Frequency source
selection 1, 2, 3
8: AI to be the frequency
source
9,10: Run command source
selection 1,2
11: Terminal control mode to
DI2 terminal function
F15.01 be the run command source 3 1 ×
selection
12: External stop command
input
13－16: Multi-step frequency
terminal 1－4
17: Frequency ramp (UP)
18: Frequency ramp (DN)
19: Clearing auxiliary
frequency setting
DI3 terminal function 20,21: Forward and reverse
F15.02 0 1 ×
selection jog 1 command control input
(JOGF1/ JOGR1)
22,23: Forward and reverse
jog 2 command control input
(JOGF2/ JOGR2)
24: Jog 1 command control
input
25: Jog 1 direction control
input (Remark: When select
DI4 terminal function 20 and 21, the functions 24
F15.03 0 1 ×
selection and 25 are invalid)
26: Acc./Dec. time selection
terminals 1
27: Acc./Dec. time selection

―160― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
terminals 2
28: Acc./Dec. mode selection
29: Acc./Dec. prohibition
30: Switch to ordinary
DI5 terminal function running mode
F15.04 0 1 ×
selection
31: Reset the stop status of
PLC operation
32: Pausing the process PID
33: Disabling the process
PID
34: Holding PID integral
35: Clearing PID integral
36: Switch to wobble
DI6 terminal function operation
F15.05 0 1 ×
selection 37: Reset the wobble
operating status
38: DC braking start while
stopping
39: External pause signal
(normally-open input)
40: External pause signal
(normally-closed input)
DI7 terminal (option 41: Coast to stop
F15.06 terminal) function (normally-open input) 0 1 ×
selection 42: Coast to stop
(normally-closed input)
43: Emergency stop
44: External fault signal
(normally-open input)
45: External fault signal
(normally-closed input)
46: External reset (RST)
DI8 terminal (option
input
F15.07 terminal) function 0 1 ×
47: Switch between motor 1
selection
and motor 2
48: Timing function input
49: Clearing the length
50: Clearing the counter to
zero A
51: Counter’s triggering
signal input
52: Length counting input
DI9 terminal (option
(only DI6 terminal is enabled)
F15.08 terminal) function 0 1 ×
53: Pulse frequency input
selection
(only DI6 terminal is enabled)
54－84: Reserved
85: Pausing PLC operation
86: Terminal stop DC braking

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －161－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
F15.09 Reserved
F15.10 Reserved
F15.11 Reserved
Acc./Dec. rate of 0.01Hz
F15.12 0.00－99.99Hz/s 1.00Hz/s ×
UP/DN terminal /s
0: 2ms
Terminal detecting
F15.13 1: 4ms 0 1 ○
interval
2: 8ms
Terminal detecting filter
F15.14 0－10000 2 1 ○
number
Bit0－Bit8 is corresponding
to DI1－DI9
Bitx: DIy terminal input
positive and negative logic
Terminal input positive
0: Positive logic
F15.15 and negative logic 000 1 ○
1: Negative logic
setting

Only when using HD30-EIO

and HD30-WIO will DI7－DI9
be enabled.
0: Two-wire operation mode
1
1: Two-wire operation mode
FWD/REV operation 2
F15.16 0 1 ×
mode 2: Three-wire operation
mode 1
3: Three-wire operation
mode 2
0: Coast to stop
Terminal operating
1: Emergency stop
F15.17 selection due to fault of 0 1 ×
2: Decelerate to stop
external equipment
3: Continue to run

0: Reserved
1: Inverter ready
2: Inverter is running (RUN)
DO1 terminal function 3: Inverter is forward running
F15.18 2 1 ×
selection 4: Inverter is reverse running
5: Inverter is DC braking
6: Inverter is in
zero-frequency status

―162― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
7: Inverter is in
zero-frequency running
8: Reserved
9,10: Frequency detection
DO2 terminal function
F15.19 threshold (FDT1,FDT2) 0 1 ×
selection
11: Frequency arriving signal
(FAR)
12: Limitation of upper limit of
frequency
13: Limitation of lower limit of
frequency
14: Limitation of upper/lower
limits of wobble frequency
RLY1 relay function 15: Simple PLC operating
F15.20 31 1 ×
selection status indication
16: Simple PLC pausing
indication
17: Simple PLC cycle
completion indication
18: Completion of simple
PLC operation stages
19: Completion of simple
RLY2 relay (extension
PLC operation
F15.21 relay) function 0 1 ×
selection 20: Output data from SCI
communication
21: Preset operating time out
22: Timing function output
23: Preset counting value
reach
24: Indicating counting value
reach
RLY3 relay (extension
25: Setting length arrive
F15.22 relay) function 0 1 ×
selection 26: Indication of motor 1 and
motor 2
27,28: Reserved
29: Undervoltage lock-up
signal (LU)
30: Overload signal (OL)
31: Inverter fault
A
32: External fault
RLY4 relay (extension 33: Inverter auto-reset fault
F15.23 relay) function 0 1 ×
34: Three-phase power
selection
supply forward input
35－37：Reserved
38: High-frequency output
(only DO2)
Output terminal Bit0－Bit2 is corresponding
F15.24 000 1 ○
positive and negative to DO1－DO2

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －163－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
logic selection Bit2－Bit5 is corresponding
to RLY1－RLY4
Bitx: DOy and RLYy
terminals output positive and
negative logic
0 means positive logic
1 means negative logic

Only when using HD30-EIO

will RLY2－RLY4 be
enabled.
ON side delay time of
F15.25 0.00－300.00s 0.00s 0.01s ○
timing function
OFF side delay time of
F15.26 0.00－300.00s 0.00s 0.01s ○
timing function
F15.27 FAR range 0.00－100.00Hz 2.50Hz 0.01Hz ○
Zero-frequency
F15.28 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
operation threshold
Zero-frequency
F15.29 0.00－upper limit 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
hysteresis
0: Detect according to the
reference frequency
F15.30 FDT1 detection mode 0 1 ○
1: Detect according to the
output frequency
F15.31 FDT1 level 0.00－upper limit 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F15.32 FDT1 lag 0.00－upper limit 1.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0: Detect according to the
reference frequency
F15.33 FDT2 detection mode 0 1 ○
1: Detect according to the
output frequency
F15.34 FDT2 level 0.00－F00.06 50.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
F15.35 FDT2 lag 0.00－F00.06 1.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
0－65535h
F15.36 Preset operating time 0: Preset operating time is 0h 1h ○
disabled
Preset counting value
F15.37 F15.38－9999 0 1 ○
arriving
Specified counting
F15.38 0－F15.37 0 1 ○
value arriving
F15.39 Reserved
F15.40 Reserved
F15.41 Reserved
F15.42 Reserved
F15.43 Terminal output delay 0.0－100.0s 0.0s 0.1s ×
Group F16 Analogue I/O Terminal Parameters (refer to pages 102－106)

―164― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Display panel with
0: Reserved
F16.00 potentiometer function 0 1 ×
selection 1: Upper limit frequency
setting source
Analogue input AI1 2: Frequency setting source
F16.01 2 1 ×
function selection 3: Auxiliary frequency
reference
Analogue input AI2 4: Process PID reference
F16.02 5 1 ×
function selection 5: Process PID feedback
6: Process PID regulating
Analogue input AI3 upper limit
F16.03 0 1 ×
function selection 7: Process PID regulating
lower limit
Analogue input AI4 8: Motor overheating signal
F16.04 0 1 ×
function selection input

Analogue input AI1

F16.05 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue input AI2
F16.08 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue input AI3
F16.11 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue input AI4
F16.14 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue input AI1
F16.06 -10.00－10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
gain
Analogue input AI2
F16.09 -10.00－10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
gain
Analogue input AI3
F16.12 -10.00－10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
gain
Analogue input AI4
F16.15 -10.00－10.00 1.00 0.01 ○
gain
Analogue input AI1
F16.07 0.01－10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
filtering time
Analogue input AI2
F16.10 0.01－10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
filtering time
Analogue input AI3
F16.13 0.01－10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
filtering time
A
Analogue input AI4
F16.16 0.01－10.00s 0.05s 0.01s ○
filtering time
Maximum input pulse
F16.17 0.0－50.0kHz 10.0kHz 0.1kHz ○
frequency
Input pulse filtering
F16.18 0－500ms 10ms 1ms ○
time

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －165－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: Reserved
1: Output frequency (0－
max. output frequency)
2: Reference frquency (0－
max. output frequency)
AO1 terminal output 3: Motor speed (0－
F16.19 1 1 ○
function selection maximum output frequency
corresponding to speed)
4: Output current (0－twice
motor’s rated current)
5: Output current (0－twice
motor’s rated current)
6－9: Reserved
10: Output torque (0－3
times motor’s rated torque)
11: Output voltage (0－1.2
times inverter’s rated
AO2 terminal output voltage)
F16.20 0 1 ○
function selection 12: Bus voltage (0－2.2
times inverter’s rated
voltage)
13: Output power (0－twice
motor’s rated power)
14: AI1 input (0－10V)
15: AI2 input (-10－10V / 0－
20mA)
16: AI3 input (-10－10V / 0－
20mA)
17: AI4 input (-10－10V / 0－
High-speed pulse
20mA)
F16.21 output function 0 1 ○
18: Output frequency (- 1
selection
times－1 times maximum
output frequency)
19: Reference frequency (- 1
times－1 times maximum
output frequency)
Analogue output AO1
F16.22 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue output AO1
F16.23 0.0－200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
gain
Analogue output AO2
F16.24 -100.0－100.0% 0.0% 0.1% ○
bias
Analogue output AO2
F16.25 0.0－200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
gain
DO2 maximum output
F16.26 0.1－50.0kHz 10.0kHz 0.1kHz ○
pulse frequency
Group F17 SCI Communication Parameters (refer to pages 106－107)

―166― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: 1-8-2 format, no parity,
RTU
1: 1-8-1 format, even
parity,RTU
2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity,
RTU
F17.00 Data format 0 1 ×
3: 1-7-2 format, no parity,
ASCII
4: 1-7-1 format, even parity,
ASCII
5: 1-7-1 format, odd parity,
ASCII
0: 1200bps
1: 2400bps
2: 4800bps
3: 9600bps
F17.01 Baud rate selection 4: 19200bps 3 1 ×
5: 38400bps
6：57600bps
7：76800bps
8：115200bps
F17.02 Local address 0－247 2 1 ×
F17.03 Host PC response time 0－1000ms 0ms 1ms ×
0.0－1000.0s
Time threshold for
When F17.04 = 0, it will not
F17.04 detecting 0.0s 0.1s ×
detect communication time
communication status
out.
0.0－1000.0s
Detecting time at When F17.05 = 0, it will not
F17.05 0.0s 0.1s ×
communication error detect the communication
error.
Action selection at
F17.06 communication time 3 1 ×
out 0: Coast to stop
Action selection at 1: Emergency stop
F17.07 3 1 ×
communication fault 2: Decelerate to stop
Action selection at 3: Continue to run
F17.08 communication 1 1 × A
peripheral device fault
0: Communication write
Communication write function parameter without
function parameter of storage EEPROM.
F17.09 1 1 ×
storage EEPROM 1: Communication write
method selection function parameter with
storage EEPROM.
Group F18 Display Control Parameters (refer to pages 107－109)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －167－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: Chinese
F18.00 Language selection 0 1 ○
1: English
Displaying contrast of
F18.01 1－10 5 1 ○
the LCD display panel

0: Reserved
Set the display 1: Inverter’s rated current
F18.02 parameter 1 during 2: Inverter’s extension 8 1 ○
operation function
3: Inverter status
4: Master setting frequency
Set the display source
F18.03 parameter 2 during 5: Master setting frequency 7 1 ○
operation 6: Auxiliary setting frequency
7: Setting frequency
8: Reference frequency (after
acceleration/ deceleration)
Set the display
9: Output frequency
F18.04 parameter 3 during 9 1 ○
10: Setting speed
operation
11: Running speed
12: Three-phase power
supply input phase sequence
Set the display 13: Output voltage
F18.05 parameter 4 during 14: Output current 13 1 ○
operation 15: Reserved
16: Output torque
17: Output power
Set the display 18: DC bus voltage
F18.06 parameter 5 during 19: Potentiometer input 14 1 ○
operation voltage
20: AI1 input voltage
21: AI1 input voltage (after
disposal)
Set the display
22: AI2 input voltage
F18.07 parameter 6 during 18 1 ○
23: AI2 input voltage (after
operation
disposal)
24: AI3 input voltage
25: AI3 input voltage (after
disposal)
Set the display
F18.08 26: AI4 input voltage 7 1 ○
parameter 1 at stop
27: AI4 input voltage (after
disposal)
28: DI6 terminal pulse input
frequency
Set the display 29: AO1 output
F18.09 18 1 ○
parameter 2 at stop
30: AO2 output
31: High-speed output pulse

―168― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
frequency
32: Heatsink temperature
Set the display 33: Set the line speed
F18.10 20 1 ○
parameter 3 at stop
34: Reference line speed
35－36: Reserved
37: Process PID reference
38: Process PID feedback
Set the display 39: Process PID error
F18.11 22 1 ○
parameter 4 at stop 40: Process PID integral
value
41: Process PID output
42: External couting value
Set the display 43: Input terminal status
F18.12 44: Output terminal status 43 1 ○
parameter 5 at stop
45: MODBUS
communication status
46: Actual length
47: Total length
Set the display 48: Total time at power on
F18.13 44 1 ○
parameter 6 at stop (hour)
49: Total time at running
(hour)
F18.14 Reserved

F18.15 Maximum line speed 0－65535 1000 1 ○

Line speed display 0: Integer
accuracy 1: One decimal
F18.16 0 1 ×
2: Two decimal
3: Three decimal
Group F19 Function-boost Parameters (refer to pages 109－116)
0: No auxiliary source
1: Digital setting 1 (the initial
value is set by F19.03 and
adjusted by and
keys on the display panel)
2: Digital setting 2 (the initial
Auxiliary frequency value is set by F19.03 and
F19.00 setting source adjusted by terminals 0 1 ○
selection UP/DN)
A
3: Digital setting 3 (the initial
value = 0, set by SCI direct
communication
4: AI analogue setting
5: Terminal pulse setting
6: Process PID output

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －169－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
0: Master setting + auxiliary
setting
1: Master setting – auxiliary
setting
2: MAX (master setting,
auxiliary setting)
Master/Auxiliary setting 3: MIN (master setting,
F19.01 0 1 ○
calculation auxiliary setting)
4: Master setting + auxiliary
setting × master setting /
max. value of master setting
5: Master setting – auxiliary
setting × master setting /
max. value of master setting
Analogue auxiliary
F19.02 0.00－9.99 1.00 0.01 ○
setting coefficient
Initial value of digital
F19.03 0.00－F00.06 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ○
auxiliary frequency
Units: Save selection at
power outage (Only when
F19.00 = 1 or 2 will F19.04
be enabled)
0: Not save auxiliary
frequency at power outage
1: The auxiliary frequency
will be saved to F19.03 at
power outage
Control selection of
F19.04 digital auxiliary 00 1 ○
Tens: Frequency disposal
frequency
when the inverter stops (Only
when F19.00 = 1 or 2 will
F19.04 be enabled)
0: Maintain the auxiliary
frequency when the inverter
stops
1: The auxiliary frequency
clears to zero when the
inverter stops
0: No adjustment
1: To adjust as per the max.
Adjustment selection of
F19.05 output frequency 1 1 ○
setting frequency
2: To adjust as per the
current frequency
Adjustment coefficient
F19.06 0.0－200.0% 100.0% 0.1% ○
of setting frequency
0: Auto stop mode
Control selection of
F19.07 1: Immediate stop mode 0 1 ○
cooling fan
2: The fan runs continuously

―170― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
when power on

Cooling fan controls

F19.08 0.0－600.0s 30.0s 0.1s ○
delaying time
F19.09 Droop control 0.00－10.00Hz 0.00Hz 0.01Hz ×
Zero-frequency
F19.10 0.00－upper limit 1.00 Hz 0.01Hz ○
threshold
0: Run according to
Action selection at frequency command
setting frequency is 1: Holding stop, no output
F19.11 lower than 2: Run according to 0 1 ×
zero-frequency zero-frequency threshold
threshold 3: Run according to
zero-frequency
Trip-free selection at 0: This function is disabled
F19.12 0 1 ×
momentary power loss 1: This function is enabled
Deceleration time at
F19.13 0.1－6000.0s 5.0s 0.1s ○
voltage compensation
Voltage rise diagnosis
time of trip-free
F19.14 0.00－10.00s 0.10s 0.01s ○
operation at
momentary power loss
220V
inverter:
Reference voltage of
248V;
F19.15 trip-free operation at 0－1200V 1V ×
380V
momentary power loss
inverter:
430V
Restart after power 0: This function is disabled
F19.16 0 1 ×
failure 1: This function is enabled
Delay time for restart
F19.17 0.00－10.00s 2.00s 0.01s ○
after power failure
0: Disabled (with braking
Protection of stall
F19.18 resistance) 1 1 ×
overvoltage
1: Enabled
220V
inverter:
390V;
F19.19 Stall overvoltage point 0－1200V 1V × A
380V
inverter:
740V
0: Disabled
1: Enabled in Acc./Dec.
Auto current limiting running process, but
F19.20 1 1 ×
selection disabled in constant speed
runnng process
2: Enabled both in Acc./Dec.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －171－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
and in constant speed
running proces
Auto current limiting G：150.0%
F19.21 20.0－200.0% 0.1% ×
threshold P：110.0%
15kW and
below:
10.0s
0.0－6000.0s 18.5－55
Deceleration time at
F19.22 0.00: Limit current without kW inverter: 0.1s ×
auto current limiting
deceleration. 30.0s
75kW and
above:
60.0s
Enabled mode of 0: Rise edge enabled mode
F19.23 0 1 ○
terminal run command 1: Level enabled mode
220V inverter: 330－400V 380V
Action voltage of
F19.24 380V inverter: 630－750V 720V 1V ×
braking unit
660V inverter: 850－1200 1130V
F19.25 Reserved
F19.26 Preset length 0－65535m 0m 1m ×
F19.27 Actual length 0－65535m 0m 1m *
F19.28 Length ratio 0.001－30.000 1.000 0.001 ×
Length checking
F19.29 0.001－1.000 1.000 0.001 ×
coefficient
Measuring shaft
F19.30 1.00－100.00cm 10.00cm 0.01cm ×
diameter
Number of pulses per
F19.31 1－9999 1 1 ×
revolution
Length arrive and
0: Output level signal
F19.32 output function 0 1 ○
1: Output 500ms pulse
selection
Record of length
0: Auto-clear
F19.33 disposal after length 0 1 ○
1: No change
arrive
Record of length 0: Auto-clear
F19.34 0 1 ○
disposal at stop 1: No change
F19.35 Reserved
F19.36 Reserved
F19.37 Reserved
F19.38 Reserved
Group F20 Protection of Fault Parameters (refer to pages 116－119)
Units: Overload pre-alarm
Overload pre-alarm
F20.00 detection 00000 1 ×
detection
0: It is active all the time in

―172― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
running status
1: It is active only at constant
speed

Tens: Action selection for

overload pre-alarm
0: The inverter doesn’t alarm
and continues operation
when detecting an active
overload signal
1: The inverter alarms and
stops operation when
detecting an active overload
signal

Hundreds: Overload
threshold selection
0: Ratio of load current to the
motor’s rated current (alarm:
motor overload)
1: Ratio of load current to the
inverter’s rated current
(alarm: inverter overload)

Thousands: Motor type

selection
0: Standard motor
1: Variable frequency

Ten thousands: Overload

protection
0: Overload protection is
enabled
1: Overload protection is
disabled
Overload pre-alarm
F20.01 20.0%－200.0% 150.0% 0.1% ×
detection threshold
Overload pre-alarm
F20.02 0.0－60.0s 5.0s 0.1s ×
detection time
A
0: Disabled
1: It is detecting all the time
in running process, and then
continues operation after
Inverter output
F20.03 detecting (alarm) 0 1 ×
load-loss detection
2: It detectes only at the
same speed, and then
continues operation after
detecting (alarm)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －173－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
3: It is detecting all the time
in running process, and then
cut off the output after
detecting (fault)
4: It is detectes only at the
same speed, and then cut off
the output after detecting
(fault)
Inverter output
F20.04 load-loss detection 0－100% 30% 1% ×
threshold
Inverter output
F20.05 load-loss detection 0.00－20.00s 1.00s 0.01s ×
time
0: Does not detect the motor
overheating.
Motor overheating 1: Positive charateristic
F20.06 0 1 ×
signal input type (PTC)
2: Negative charateristic
(NTC)
Thermistor value at
F20.07 0.0－10.0kΩ 5.0kΩ 0.1kΩ ×
motor overheating
Input phase loss
F20.08 0－50% 30% 1% ×
detection reference
Input phase loss
F20.09 1.00－5.00s 1.00s 0.01s ×
detection time
Output phase loss
F20.10 0－50% 20% 1% ×
detection reference
Output phase loss
F20.11 0.00－20.00s 3.00s 0.01s ×
detection time
0－100%
PID reference lose
F20.12 0: Does not detect PID 0% 1% ×
detected value
reference lose
0.00－10.00s
PID reference loss
F20.13 When set to 0, does not 0.20s 0.01s ×
detection time
detect PID reference loss
0－100%
PID feedback loss
F20.14 0: Does not detect PID 0% 1% ×
detected value
feedback loss
0.00－10.00s
PID feedback loss
F20.15 When set to 0, does not 0.20s 0.01s ×
detection time
detect PID feedback loss
Detection value at PID 0－100%
F20.16 feedback out of the 100%: Does not detect PID 100% 1% ×
limit feedback out of the limit
F20.17 Detection time at PID 0.00－10.00s 0.20s 0.01s ×

―174― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
feedback out of the When set to 0, does not
limit detect PID feedback out of
the limit
0－100
F20.18 Auto reset times 0 1 ×
0: No auto reset function
0.1s/
F20.19 Auto reset interval 2.0－20.0s/times 5.0s/ times ×
times
Units: In auto reset process
0: Faulted relay doesn’t act
1: Faulted relay acts
Faulted relay action
F20.20 00 1 ○
selection Tens: In the undervoltage
process
0: Faulted relay doesn’t act
1: Faulted relay acts
0: No fault history
E0001: Acc. overcurrent
E0002: Dec. overcurrent
E0003: Costant overcurrent
E0004: Acc. overvoltage
E0005: Dec. overvoltage
E0006: Constant overvoltage
E0007: Stall overvoltage
E0008: Fault of power
module
E0009: Heatsink overheat
E0010: Fault of braking unit
E0011: CPUfault
E0012: Parameters
auto-tuning fault
Type of fifth latest (the E0013: Contactor is not
F20.21 0 1 *
last) fault actuated
E0014: Fault of current
detection circuit
E0015: Fault of input phase
E0016: Fault of output phase
E0017: Inverter overload
E0018: Inverter output is A
unloaded
E0019: Motor overload
E0020: Motor overheat
E0021: Access fault of
Control board EEPROM
E0022: Access fault of
display panel EEPROM (only
displaying without any
protection)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －175－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
E0023: Fault setting of
parameters
E0024: Fault of external
equipment
E0025: PID reference loss
E0026: PID feedback loss
E0027: PID feedback out of
limiting
E0028: SCI communication
time-out
E0029: SCI communication
error
Setting frequency at
F20.22 0.00－400.00Hz 0Hz 0.01Hz *
the last fault
Running frequency at
F20.23 0.00－400.00Hz 0Hz 0.1Hz *
the last fault
Bus voltage at the last
F20.24 0－999V 0V 1V *
fault
Output voltage at the
F20.25 0－999V 0V 1V *
last fault
Output current at the 7.5kW or above: actual value 0.0A 0.1A
F20.26 *
last fault 5.5kW or below: actual value 0.00A 0.01A
Input terminal status at
F20.27 0－0x1FF 0 1 *
the last fault
Output terminal status
F20.28 0－0x7FF 0 1 *
at the last fault
Interval of fifth latest
F20.29 0－6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
fault
Type of fourth latest
F20.30 0－99 0 1 *
fault
Interval of fourth latest
F20.31 0－6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
fault
F20.32 Type of third latest fault 0－99 0 1 *
Interval of third latest
F20.33 0－6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
fault
Type of second latest
F20.34 0－99 0 1 *
fault
Interval of second
F20.35 0－6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
latest fault
F20.36 Type of first latest fault 0－99 0 1 *
Interval of first latest
F20.37 0－6553.5 hours 0.0 0.1h *
fault
Group F21 Reserved
Group F22 Reserved
Group F23 PWM Control Parameters (refer to pages 120－120)

―176― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix A Parameters

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
Dependent
Set the carrier
F23.00 1－16kHz on inverter 1kHz ×
frequency
model
F23.01 Reserved
0: Disabled
F23.02 PWM overshoot enable 1 1 ×
1: Enabled
0: Two-phase modulation or
three-phase modulation
F23.03 PWM modulation mode 0 1 ×
1: Three-phase modulation
2: Two-phase modulation
Group U User Menu Mode Display Parameters (refer to parameters 120－122)
User menu map of
U00.00 00.01 0.01 ○
setting 1
User menu map of
U00.02 00.06 0.01 ○
setting 2
User menu map of
U00.04 00.08 0.01 ○
setting 3
User menu map of
U00.06 00.13 0.01 ○
setting 4
User menu map of
U00.08 00.10 0.01 ○
setting 5
User menu map of
U00.10 00.11 0.01 ○
setting 6
User menu map of
U00.12 02.13 0.01 ○
setting 7
User menu map of
U00.14 00.00－23.02,99.99 03.01 0.01 ○
setting 8
99.99 is corresponding to no
User menu map of
U00.16 parameter mapping function 03.02 0.01 ○
setting 9
User menu map of
U00.18 08.00 0.01 ○
setting 10
User menu map of
U00.20 08.01 0.01 ○
setting 11
User menu map of
U00.22 08.02 0.01 ○
setting 12
User menu map of
U00.24 08.03 0.01 ○ A
setting 13
User menu map of
U00.26 08.04 0.01 ○
setting 14
User menu map of
U00.28 ― 0.01 ○
setting 15
User menu map of
U00.30 ― 0.01 ○
setting 16
The setting value of
U00.01 ― ― ―
map 1

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －177－

Appendix A Parameters Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Factory Modified
No. Name Range Unit Setting
Default attributes
The setting value of
U00.03 ― ―
map 2
The setting value of
U00.05 ― ―
map 3
The setting value of
U00.07 ― ―
map 4
The setting value of
U00.09 ― ―
map 5
The setting value of
U00.11 ― ―
map 6
The setting value of
U00.13 ― ―
map 7
The setting value of
U00.15 ― ―
map 8
The setting value of
U00.17 ― ―
map 9
The setting value of
U00.19 ― ―
map 10
The setting value of
U00.21 ― ―
map 11
The setting value of
U00.23 ― ―
map 12
The setting value of
U00.25 ― ―
map 13
The setting value of
U00.27 ― ―
map 14
The setting value of
U00.29 ― ―
map 15
The setting value of
U00.31 ― ―
map 16

―178― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix B User Menu Setting Table

Appendix B User Menu Setting Table

No. Mapping parameter Setting value
U00.00
U00.02
U00.04
U00.06
U00.08
U00.10
U00.12
U00.14
U00.16
U00.18
U00.20
U00.22
U00.24
U00.26
U00.28
U00.30

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －179－

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol

Appendix C Communication Protocol

1. Peripherals Support
HD30 series Inverters provide two RS485 communication interfaces which both use the standard
MODBUS communication protocol. By using the host computer (including communication
devices such as computer and PLC) the user can operate to read-write the inverter’s function
code, read the status parameters and write the control command etc. The inverter is in slave
mode when it is communicating.

2. Interfaces
1) Interface mode and pin definition

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 8
RJ45 terminal Signal +5V 485+ +5V GND GND GND 485- Reserved

Definition of the RJ45 pin signal

2) Communication mode
RS485 interface: asynchronous, semi-duplex.
Default: 8-N-2, 9600bps.

3. Network Mode

PC master PLC master PC master PLC master

RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS485

switching module RS485 switching module

HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30 HD30

Single-master and multi-slave Single-master and single-slave

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －181－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
4. Protocol Format
The MODBUS protocol simultaneously supports RTU mode and ASCII mode, with corresponding
frame format as shown below:
RTU mode
Modbus data frame

Frame head (at least Slave Function Frame tail (at least
3.5 character spacing) address parameter Data Checking 3.5 character spacing)

ASCII mode
Modbus data frame

Frame head Slave Function Frame tail

address parameter Data Checking
(0x3A) (0x0D,0x0A)

MODBUS adopts “Big Endian” encoding mode, higher byte prior to lower byte at sending.
1) RTU mode
In the RTU mode, the idle time of frame head and frame tail passing bus should be not less than
3.5 bytes, and data checking relies on CRC-16. The whole information need be checked. The
concrete CRC checking is referred to the page 194.
Take RTU data for example: To read internal register F00.08 of No. 1 inverter:
The command frame:

Address Parameter Register Address Read char no. Checksum

0x01 0x03 0x00 0x08 0x00 0x01 0x5 0xC8

The response frame:

Address Parameter Response Byte Content of register Checksum
0x01 0x03 0x02 0x13 0x88 0xB5 0x12

2) ASCII mode
In ASCII mode, the frame head is “0x3A”, while the frame tail default is “0x0D”“0x0A” and the
frame tail can be set by the users. In ASCII mode, all the data bytes will be sent via ASCII code
except frame head and frame tail, higher 4-byte prior to lower 4-byte at sending. In ASCII mode,
data is 7-byte and for the “A”－“F” will adopt their uppercase of the ASCII code. The data adopts
LRC checking, covering the slave address and data. Checksum is the character of data that is
involved in checking and the complement code of carry bit.
Take ASCII data for example: To write 4000 (0x0FA0) to the internal register F00.08 of Slave 1.
LRC checking = the complement code of (0x01+0x41+0x00+0x08+0x0F+0xA0) =0x07

―182― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol

Frame LRC Frame

Address Parameter Register address Written content
head checking tail
Character : 0 1 4 1 0 0 0 8 0 F A 0 0 7 CR LF
ASCII 3A 30 31 34 31 30 30 30 38 30 46 41 30 30 37 0D 0A

5. Scaling of Inverter Transmitting Values

Except the parameters of the remarks, all other function codes can define the scaling relationship
of the specified function code via referring the manual’s minimum unit.
Remarks:
1) Communication data 0－2000 of F04.03, F21.01, F16.05, F16.08, F16.11, F16.14, F16.22 and
F16.24 corresponds to data -1000 － +1000.
2) Communication data 0－200 of F16.06, F16.09, F16.12 and F16.15 corresponds to data -100
－ +100.
3) Communication data 0－16000 of state parameter 0x3318 corresponds to data -8000 －
+8000.

6. Protocol Function
1) Supported function
MODBUS protocol supports the below parameter operation:
Function code Instructions
0x03 To read the inverter’s function parameters and parameters in operating status
To rewrite function parameter (whether can be saved by F17.09 at power off) or control
0x06
parameter of single inverter
0x08 Circuit diagnosis
To rewrite function parameter (cannot be saved at power off) or control parameter of
0x41
single inverter
0x42 Function parameters management
To rewrite function parameter (whether can be saved by F17.09 at power off) or control
0x10
parameter of certain inverters
To rewrite function parameter (can be saved at power off) or control parameter of
0x43
certain inverters

If the operation command fails, the response is fault code. For instance, continuously read 13
function codes from F00.00 then the return frame will be as follows:
Address Parameter Error code Checksum
0x01 0x83 0x03 0x01 0x31

The fault code is the same as (function parameter＋0x80), and its instruction is as follows:

Exception code Instructions

0x1 Illegal function parameters.
0x2 Illegal register address.
0x3 Data fault. Data is beyond the upper/lower limit. C
0x4 Slave operation fails (including fault caused by data invalid).

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －183－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Exception code Instructions

Unsupported operation (unsupported to read the attributes, factory default and
0x16
upper/lower limit for the control parameter and status parameter).
0x17 The register number of command frame is fault.
0x18 Incorrect information frame: including incorrect information length and incorrect checking.
0x20 Parameters cannot be modified.
0x21 Parameters are unchangeable when the inverter is in running status.
0x22 Parameters are protected by password.

2) The command and response frame of MODBUS protocol parameter (in RTU mode)
① To read inverter parameters (function code 0x03)
Protocol data unit Length of data (byte) Range
Address 1 0－247, 0 is broadcast address
Function code 1 0x03
Command frame Starting register address 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
No. of register 2 0x0001－0x000C
CRC/LRC checking 2/1
Address 1 1－247
Function code 1 0x03
Response frame Read byte no. 1 2* no. of registers
Register content 2* no. of registers
CRC/LRC checking 2/1

② To rewrite function parameter (whether can be saved by F17.09 at power off) or control
parameter (function code 0x06) of single inverter (function code 0x06)
③ To rewrite function parameter (cannot be saved at power off) or control parameter of single
inverter (function code 0x41)
Protocol data unit Length of data (byte) Range
Address 1 0－247, 0 is broadcast address
Function code 1 0x06. 0x41
Command frame Register address 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
Register content 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
CRC/LRC checking 2/1
Address 1 1－247
Function code 1 0x06. 0x41
Response frame Register address 1 0x0000－0xFFFF
Register content 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
CRC/LRC checking 2/1

―184― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
④ Circuit diagnosis (function code 0x08)
Protocol data unit Length of data (byte) Range
Address 1 0－247, 0 is broadcast address
Function code 1 0x08
Command frame Subfunction code 2 0x0000－0x0030
Data 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
CRC /LRC checking 2/1
Address 1 1－247
Function code 1 0x08
Response frame Subfunction code 2 0x0000－0x0030
Data 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
CRC /LRC checking 2/1

Subfunction code of circuit diagnosis:

Code Data (command) Data (response) Subfunction meanings
Reinitialize communication, disabling no-response
0x0000 0x0000
mode
0x0001
Reinitialize communication, disabling no-response
0xFF00 0xFF00
mode
“New frame tail” “New frame Set ASCII frame tail, and the new frame tail will
and “00” occupy tail” and “00” replace the old newline characters, but it will not be
0x0003 higher and lower occupy higher saved at power loss.
bytes and lower bytes Note: new frame tail cannot be larger than 0x7F, and
respectively respectively shouldn’t be 0x3A.
After select no-response mode, the slaves then only
0x0004 0x0000 No response answer to “reinitialize communication command”. It
can tell and isolate the faulty slaves.
To set slave no-response invalid command and faulty
0x0000 0x0000
command.
0x0030
To set slave response invalid command and faulty
0x0001 0x0001
command.

⑤ To rewrite function parameter (whether can be saved by F17.09 at power off) or control
parameter of certain inverters (function code 0x10)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －185－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
To rewrite function parameter (can be saved at power off) or control parameter of certain inverters
(function code 0x43)

Protocol data unit Length of data (byte) Range

0－247, 0 is broadcast
Address 1
address
Function code 1 0x10, 0x43
Starting register address 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
Command frame
Operation register number 2 0x0000－0x0004
Register content bytes 1 2*operation register number
Register content 2*operation register number
CRC /LRC checking 2/1
Address 1 1－247
Function code 1 0x10, 0x43
Response frame Starting register address 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
Operation register number 2 0x0000－0x0004
CRC /LRC checking 2/1

This command rewrites the contents of continuous data unit from starting register address where
is mapped as inverter’s function parameter and control parameter etc. The inverter will start to
save from low address to high address of the register when it continuously saves many register
parameters. The saving operation will return from the first faulty address if it isn’t completely
success.
⑥ Function parameters management (function code 0x42)
The inverter function parameters management includes reading the upper/lower limit of
parameters, to read parameter characteristics, to read the biggest intergroup index of function
parameters, to read the previous and next function parameter group number, to read index of the
parameter being displayed and to display next status parameter. The parameter characteristics
include read-write ability, parameter units and scaling. These commands are used to adjust
remotely inverter parameters.
The command and response frames of the function parameters management are as follows:
Protocol data unit Length of data (byte) Range
0－247, 0 is broadcast
Address 1
address
Function code 1 0x42
Command frame
Subfunction code 2 0x0000－0x0008
Data 2 Depends on inverter model
CRC /LRC checking 2/1
Address 1 1－247
Function code 1 0x42
Response frame Subfunction code 2 0x0000－0x0008
Data 2 0x0000－0xFFFF
CRC /LRC checking 2/1

―186― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
On condition that the operation command fails, response is fault code and exception code.
Subfunction under function parameter management:
Code Data (command) Data (response) Subfunction meanings
To read the upper limit of
The function parameter group function parameter.
no. and intergroup index The upper limit of function (Unsupported this operation
0x0000
occupy the higher and lower parameter. of reading upper limit in
bytes respectively. status and control
parameters)
To read the lower limit of
The function parameter group function parameter.
no. and intergroup index The lower limit of function (Unsupported this operation
0x0001
occupy the higher and lower parameter. of reading lower limit in
bytes respectively. status and control
parameters)
To read the characteristic of
The function parameter group Characteristics of function
function parameters.
no. and intergroup index parameters and see the table
0x0002 (Unsupported this operation
occupy the higher and lower of parameter’s characteristics
of reading characteristic in
bytes respectively. for more details.
control parameters)
The function parameter group
The max. value of intergroup To read the max value of
0x0003 no. occupies the higher byte,
index. intergroup index.
and the lower byte is “00”.
The function parameter group Next function parameter group
To read next function
0x0004 no. occupies the higher byte, no. occupies the higher byte,
parameter group no.
and the lower byte is “00”. and the lower byte is “00”.
Previous function parameter
The function parameter group
group no. occupier the higher To read previous function
0x0005 no. occupies the higher byte,
byter, and the lower byte is parameter group no.
and the lower byte is “00”.
“00”.
The status parameter index at To read status parameter
0x0006 0x3300
current displaying. index at current display.
The parameter index at next To display next status
0x0007 0x3300
status. parameter.
To read factory default of
The parameter group no. and
function parameter.
intergroup index occupy the
0x0008 Factory default. (Unsupported this operation
higher and lower bytes
in status and control
respectively.
parameters)

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －187－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
The function parameter characteristics are 2-byte, with definition shown as below:
Characteristics (Bit) Value Definition
0B To modify the upper limit as per character restriction.
Bit0
1B To modify the upper limit as per 4-byte restriction.
00B without decimal fraction
01B 1 decimal fraction
Bit2－Bit1
10B 2 decimal fraction
11B 3 decimal fraction
001B To display length 1
010B To display length 2
011B To display length 3
Bit5－Bit3
100B To display length 4
101B To display length 5
Reserved
00B Actual parameters, unchangeable
01B Changeable
Bit7－Bit6 10B Unchangeable in running status
Set by the manufacturer. The users are not allowed to
11B
make any modification.
00000B Without char
00001B Unit is Hz
00010B Unit is A
Bit12－Bit8 00011B Unit is V
00100B Unit is rpm
00101B Unit is %
Reserved
Bit15－Bit13 Manufacturer reserved

―188― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
7. Address Mapping
The inverter’s function parameters, control parameters and status parameters are all mapped as
MODBUS’s read-write register. And their group numbers are mapped as the higher bytes of
register address while the relationships are shown as below table.
High bytes of register High bytes of register
Group number Group number
address address
0x00 F00 0x01 F01
0x02 F02 0x03 F03
0x04 F04 0x05 F05
0x06 F06 0x07 F07
0x08 F08 0x09 F09
0x0a F10 0x0b F11
0x0d F13 0x0f F15
0x10 F16 0x11 F17
0x12 F18 0x13 F19
0x14 F20 0x17 F23
0x28 P00 0x29 P01
0x2a P02 0x2b P03
0x2c P04 0x2d P05
0x18 U00 0x32 Control parameter group
0x33 Status parameter group

Their intergroup indexes are mapped as the lower bytes. Please refer to the instruction manual
for more details on function parameters F00－F23, P00－P05 and U00.
The users can realize the inverter’s starting, stopping and running speed setting through the
control parameter, and obtain the inverter’s running frequency, output current, etc. through
indexing the inverter’s status parameters.
1) Control parameters
The inverter’s control parameter intergroup indexes are as follows:
Register address Parameter name Retained or not at power loss
0x3200 Control command character No
0x3201 Running frequency setting No
0x3202 Auxiliary running frequency setting No
0x3203 Reserved
0x3204 Virtual terminal control setting No

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －189－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Definition of inverter control command words:

Control word (Bit) Value Definition Function description

1 Run command enabled To control the inverter’s starting and
Bit0
0 Run command disabled stop (in edge triggering mode)
0 Forward Running direction: have the same
Bit1
1 Reverse function as terminal FWD/ REV
Decelerate to stop the inverter (in edge
1 Stop mode: Decelerate to stop
Bit2 triggering mode)
0 Reserved
Emergency to stop the inverter (in edge
1 Stop mode: emergency to stop
Bit3 triggering mode)
0 Reserved
Coast to stop the inverter (in edge
1 Stop mode: coast to stop
Bit4 triggering mode)
0 Reserved
The inverter is displaying external fault,
1 Stop mode: external fault and will stop in accordance with F17.08
Bit5
setting mode or continue to run
0 Reserved
1 Jog forward run Jog forward control
Bit6
0 Jog forward stop
1 Jog reverse run Jog reverse control
Bit7
0 Jog reverse stop
1 Fault reset enabled Fault reset control
Bit8
0 Fault reset disabled
Bit9—Bit11 0 Reserved
The present sending control word is
1 Present control enabled
valid
Bit12
The present sending control word is
0 Present control disabled
valid
Bit13－Bit15 0 Reserved

Inverter control command (word logic combinations of control commands):

Register content Control command Register address Parameter name

0x1001 Forward running 0x1020 Stop due to external fault
0x1003 Reverse running 0x1040 Forward jog
0x1004 Decelerate to stop 0x1080 Reverse jog
0x1008 Emergency to stop 0x1100 Fault reset
0x1010 Coast to stop

―190― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
Definition of virtual terminal control setting word:
Control word (Bit) Value Definition
0 DO1 output is disabled
Bit0
1 DO1 output is enabled
0 DO2 output is disabled
Bit1
1 DO2 output is enabled
0 RLY1output is disabled
Bit2
1 RLY1 output is enabled
0 RLY2 output is disabled
Bit3
1 RLY2 output is enabled
0 RLY3 output is disabled
Bit4
1 RLY3 output is enabled
0 RLY4 output is disabled
Bit5
1 RLY4 output is enabled
0 RLY5 output is disabled
Bit6
1 RLY5 output is enabled
0 RLY6 output is disabled
Bit7
1 RLY6 output is enabled
0 RLY7 output is disabled
Bit8
1 RLY7 output is enabled
0 RLY8 output is disabled
Bit9
1 RLY8 output is enabled
0 RLY9 output is disabled
Bit10
1 RLY9 output is enabled
0 RLY10 output is disabled
Bit11
1 RLY10 output is enabled
Bit12－Bit15 Reversed Reversed

2) Status parameter
Inverter status parameter intergroup index is as following table:

Register Register Parameter name

Parameter name
address address
0x3300 Inverter’s series 0x3311 Setting speed
0x3301 Software version of the U1 0x3312 Running speed
Special software version of the U1 Three-phase power input phase
0x3303 0x3313
sequence
0x3305 Software version of the display panel 0x3314 Output voltage
0x3306 Custom series No. 0x3315 Output current

Units: the present motor 0x3317 Output torque

0: Motor 1 0x3318 Output power
0x3307
1: Motor 2 0x3319 DC bus voltage C
0x331A Input voltage of display panel of

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －191－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Register Register Parameter name

Parameter name
address address
Tens: control modes potentiometer
0: V/f control without PG 0x331B AI1 input voltage
1: Reversed 0x331C AI1 input voltage (after disposal)
2: Vector control without PG
0x331D AI2 input voltage
0x331E AI2 input voltage (after disposal)
0x3308 Inverter’s rated current 0x331F AI3 input voltage
0x3309 Inverter’s extension function 0x3320 AI3 input voltage (after disposal)
Units: 0x3321 AI4 input voltage
Bit0: Inverter fault 0x3322 AI4 input voltage (after disposal)
Bit1: Run/stop 0x3323 DI6 terminal pulse input frequency
Bit2: Forward/reverse
0x3324 AO1 output
Bit3: Zero speed to run
0x3325 AO2 output
Tens:
Bit0&1: Acc./ Dec./ constant 0x3326 High-speed output pulse frequency
Bit2: Reversed 0x3327 Heatsink temperature
Bit3: DC braking (includes starting DC 0x332C Process PID reference
braking and stop DC braking) 0x332D Process PID feedback
0x332E Process PID error
0x330A Hundreds:
0x332F Process PID integral
Bit0: Parameter auto-tuning
Bit1: Reversed 0x3330 Process PID output
Bit2: Speed limitation 0x3331 External counting value
Bit3: Reversed 0x3332 Input terminal status
0x3333 Output terminal status
Thousands:
0x3334 MODBUS communication status
Bit0: Stall overvoltage
0x3335 Actual length
Bit1: Stall overcurrent
0x3336 Total length
Bit2: Reversed
Bit3: Reversed 0x3337 Total time at power on (hour)
0x3338 Total time at running (hour)
0x330B Master setting frequency source 0x3339 High byte of motor total energy
0x330C Master setting frequency 0x333A Low byte of motor total energy
0x330D Auxiliary setting frequency 0x333B High byte of this running energy
0x330E Setting frequency 0x333C Low byte of this running energy
0x330F Reference frquency (after Acc./Dec.) 0x333D The present fault code
0x3310 Output frequency 0x3345 The current moment (hours)

For instance: The register address of function parameter F03.02 is 0x0302, and that of function
parameter F16.01 is 0x1001.

―192― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
8. Special instruction
1) For the data frame in ASCII mode, if the frame length is an even number, the frame is
abandoned.
2) Group F08 (Asynchronous motor 1 parameter setting), Group F12 (Reserved), F13.00－
F13.15 (Asynchronous motor 2 parameter setting) and Group F17 (SCI communication
parameters) are the inverter parameter which can be read but cannot be modified by the host
computer.
3) F01.00 (user password) cannot be set and adjusted through communication as well, but the
user can verify the user password by writing F01.00 and get access to adjust inverter function
parameters on the host. After adjustment, the user can close the permission by writing invalid
password to F01.00.
4) If many multi-function input terminals are set the same function, it may cause dysfunction.
Therefore, the user should avoid this case when modify the multi-function terminal function via
the MODBUS.

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －193－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
9. CRC checking
In order to satisfy speed increasing needs, CRC-16 normally adopts form mode. The following is
CRC-16 C language channel code. Please note the final result has exchanged the higher and
lower bytes. That is the right CRC checksum to be sent.
unsigned short CRC16 ( unsigned char *msg, unsigned char length)
/* The function returns the CRC as a unsigned short type */
{
/* high byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned char uchCRCHi = 0xFF ;
/* low byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned char uchCRCLo = 0xFF ;
/* index into CRC lookup table */
unsigned uIndex ;
/* pass through message buffer */
While (length--)
{
/* calculate the CRC */
uIndex = uchCRCLo ^ *msg++ ;
uchCRCLo = uchCRCHi ^ (crcvalue[uIndex] >>8);
uchCRCHi =crcvalue[uIndex]&0xff;
}
return (uchCRCHi | uchCRCLo<<8) ;
}
/* Table of CRC values */
const unsigned int crcvalue[ ] = {
0x0000,0xC1C0,0x81C1,0x4001,0x01C3,0xC003,0x8002,0x41C2,0x01C6,0xC006,0x8007,
0x41C7,0x0005,0xC1C5,0x81C4,0x4004,0x01CC,0xC00C,0x800D,0x41CD,0x000F,0xC1CF,
0x81CE,0x400E,0x000A,0xC1CA,0x81CB,0x400B,0x01C9,0xC009,0x8008,0x41C8,0x01D8,
0xC018,0x8019,0x41D9,0x001B,0xC1DB,0x81DA,0x401A,0x001E,0xC1DE,0x81DF,0x401F,
0x01DD,0xC01D,0x801C,0x41DC,0x0014,0xC1D4,0x81D5,0x4015,0x01D7,0xC017,0x8016,
0x41D6,0x01D2,0xC012,0x8013,0x41D3,0x0011,0xC1D1,0x81D0,0x4010,0x01F0,0xC030,
0x8031,0x41F1,0x0033,0xC1F3,0x81F2,0x4032,0x0036,0xC1F6,0x81F7,0x4037,0x01F5,
0xC035,0x8034,0x41F4,0x003C,0xC1FC,0x81FD,0x403D,0x01FF,0xC03F,0x803E,0x41FE,
0x01FA,0xC03A,0x803B,0x41FB,0x0039,0xC1F9,0x81F8,0x4038,0x0028,0xC1E8,0x81E9,
0x4029,0x01EB,0xC02B,0x802A,0x41EA,0x01EE,0xC02E,0x802F,0x41EF,0x002D,0xC1ED,
0x81EC,0x402C,0x01E4,0xC024,0x8025,0x41E5,0x0027,0xC1E7,0x81E6,0x4026,0x0022,
0xC1E2,0x81E3,0x4023,0x01E1,0xC021,0x8020,0x41E0,0x01A0,0xC060,0x8061,0x41A1,
0x0063,0xC1A3,0x81A2,0x4062,0x0066,0xC1A6,0x81A7,0x4067,0x01A5,0xC065,0x8064,
0x41A4,0x006C,0xC1AC,0x81AD,0x406D,0x01AF,0xC06F,0x806E,0x41AE,0x01AA,0xC06A,
0x806B,0x41AB,0x0069,0xC1A9,0x81A8,0x4068,0x0078,0xC1B8,0x81B9,0x4079,0x01BB,

―194― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
0xC07B,0x807A,0x41BA,0x01BE,0xC07E,0x807F,0x41BF,0x007D,0xC1BD,0x81BC,0x407C,
0x01B4,0xC074,0x8075,0x41B5,0x0077,0xC1B7,0x81B6,0x4076,0x0072,0xC1B2,0x81B3,
0x4073,0x01B1,0xC071,0x8070,0x41B0,0x0050,0xC190,0x8191,0x4051,0x0193,0xC053,
0x8052,0x4192,0x0196,0xC056,0x8057,0x4197,0x0055,0xC195,0x8194,0x4054,0x019C,
0xC05C,0x805D,0x419D,0x005F,0xC19F,0x819E,0x405E,0x005A,0xC19A,0x819B,0x405B,
0x0199,0xC059,0x8058,0x4198,0x0188,0xC048,0x8049,0x4189,0x004B,0xC18B,0x818A,
0x404A,0x004E,0xC18E,0x818F,0x404F,0x018D,0xC04D,0x804C,0x418C,0x0044,0xC184,
0x8185,0x4045,0x0187,0xC047,0x8046,0x4186,0x0182,0xC042,0x8043,0x4183,0x0041,
0xC181,0x8180,0x4040}

It takes a comparatively long time to online calculate the CRC checksum of each byte, but it will
save program space. Code of online calculating CRC is shown below:
unsigned int crc_check(unsigned char *data,unsigned char length)
{
int i;
unsigned crc_result=0xffff;
while(length--)
{
crc_result^=*data++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_result&0x01)
crc_result=(crc_result>>1)^0xa001;
else
crc_result=crc_result>>1;
}
}
return (crc_result=((crc_result&0xff)<<8)|(crc_result>>8));
}

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －195－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
10. Application case
Remarks: Please verify all the hardware equipments are connected well before controlling the
inverter via communication. In addition, please preset the communication data format, baud rate
and communication address
1. To read the command frame of the maximum output frequency of Slave 2 (to read F00.06)

Address Code Register address Word no. of read Checksum

0x02 0x03 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x01 0x64 0x38

Corresponding answer frame (F00.06=50.00Hz):

Address Code Answer byte Register content Checksum

0x02 0x03 0x02 0x13 0x88 0XF1 0x12

2. To read the DC bus voltage of Slave 2 (to read status parameter)

Address Code Register address Word no. of read Checksum

0x02 0x03 0x33 0x19 0x00 0x01 0x5A 0xBA

Corresponding answer frame (the DC bus voltage is 537V)

Address Code Answer byte Register content Checksum
0x02 0x03 0x02 0x02 0x19 0x3C 0xEE

3. To read the setting frequency of Slave 2 (set F00.13 to 45.00Hz)

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x00 0x0D 0x11 0x94 0x15 0xC5

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x00 0x0D 0x11 0x94 0x15 0xC5

4. When the frequency setting source F00.10 = 2, set the frequency value to 45.00Hz by writing
the register address 0x3201.

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum

0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x01 0x11 0x94 0xDB 0x7E

―196― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd Appendix C Communication Protocol
5. F00.11=2, give the reverse operation command to the address 2 of Slave
Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x03 0xCA 0x80

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x03 0xCA 0x80

6. F00.11=2, give the deceleration stop command to the address 2 of Slave

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x04 0x8B 0x42

7. F00.11=2, give the emergency stop command to the address 2 of Slave

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x08 0x8B 0x42

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x08 0x8B 0x42

8. F00.11=2, give the coast to stop command to the address 2 of Slave

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum

0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x10 0x8B 0x4D

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x10 0x8B 0x4D

9. External fault stop control of Slave 2 via communication (E0024 fault)

Address Parameter Register address Register content Checksum

0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x20 0x8B 0x59

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x10 0x20 0x8B 0x59

HD30 Series Inverters User Manual －197－

Appendix C Communication Protocol Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
10. Give the fault reset signal to the address 2 of Slave
Address Parameter Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x8B 0x11

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Code Register address Register content Checksum
0x02 0x06 0x32 0x00 0x11 0x00 0x8B 0x11

11. Functional parameter management and read the lower limit of F02.03
Address Code Subfunction code Data Checksum
0x02 0x42 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x69 0x57

Corresponding answer frame:

Address Parameter Subfunction code Data Checksum
0x02 0x42 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x28 0x36

―198― HD30 Series Inverters User Manual

 Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Product Warranty Card

Unit:
Clinet info

Add. Of unit:

P.C.: Contact person:

Tel.: Fax:
Product info

Barcode on the product body (paste here):

Power: Model:

Contrat number: Purchasing date:

Service unit info

Service unit:

Contact person: Tel.:

Maintenance staff: Tel.:

Maintenance date:

User’s quality evaluation for the service:

口 Better 口 Good 口 Common 口 Poor
Other opinions:

User signature: Date:

Interview record of Customer Service Center:

口 Interviewed by telephone 口 Interviewed by letters
Others:

Technical service engineer signature: Date:

 Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd
Warranty Agreement

1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the barcode on the product
body). During the warranty period, if the product fails or it is damaged under condition
of normal use by following the user’s manual, our company will be responsible for free
maintenance.
2. The starting time of the warranty period is manufacturing date (see the barcode on the
product body), but we could negotiate settlement under special condition.
3. Within warranty period, maintenance will be charged for damages caused by the
following reasons:
A. The damage is caused by improper use or repair/modification without prior
permission;
B. The damage is caused by abnormal voltage, fire, flood, other disasters and
second disasters;
C. The damage is caused by dropped or transportation after purchase;
D. The damage is caused by the operation not following this user’s manual;
E. The damage or failure is caused by the trouble out of the equipment (e.g. external
device).
4. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product
Warranty Card in detail.
5. The maintenance fees are charged according to the newly adjusted Maintenance Price
List by our company.
6. In general, the warranty card will not be reissued. Please keep the card and present it
to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
7. If there is any problem during the service, please contact the agent of our company or
our company directly.
8. This agreement should be interpreted by Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd.

Shenzhen Hpmont Technology Co., Ltd

Address: 3F, Building 28, Wangjingkeng Industry Park, Xili Dakan, Nanshan
District, Shenzhen, China
Telephone: 4008-858-959 or 189 4871 3800
P.C.: 518055
Http://www.hpmont.com
E-mail：[email protected]